JP6857457B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine having an advantageous section .

In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161344

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to properly end the advantageous section .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown).
The present invention
As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section.
In the normal section, in the game in which the predetermined lottery result (winning of the push order bell) is obtained, the operation mode of the stop switch (correct answer push order) which is advantageous to the player is not notified.
In the advantageous section, in the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained, there is a case where the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous.
A storage means (RWM53 that stores the upper limit counter 69b) that can be updated according to the execution of the game in the advantageous section is provided.
When the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to shift to the special game state (special game).
In the special gaming state in the advantageous section, the information stored in the storage means can be updated according to the execution of the game.
Even in the game before the end of the special game state, if the information stored in the storage means becomes a value for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section is configured to end.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (when the 1450th game of the advantageous section is reached), a specific effect (ending effect) can be executed.
When the specific effect is being executed in a game that ends the advantageous section under a predetermined situation (a situation that is not a special game state) , the specific effect is ended and the specific effect is terminated.
It is characterized in that it has a case where a predetermined freeze is executed at the end of the advantageous section and a case where a predetermined freeze is not executed at the end of the advantageous section.

According to the present invention, since the advantageous section is not extended due to the special gaming state, it is possible to prevent the number of game media provided in the advantageous section from becoming excessive .

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the storage number display LED, the advantageous section display LED, the acquisition number display LED, the settlement switch and the like. It is a figure which shows the main control board housed in a board case, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, the effective line and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (2) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (3) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (4) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (5) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (6) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (1) which shows the figurative number table. It is a figure (2) which shows the figurative number table. It is a figure which shows the push order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of push order instruction number, advantageous push order, and display contents. It is a figure which shows the production group number table. It is a figure explaining the transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of the advantageous section display LED. It is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) which shows the processing flow of a main control board, the acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (Example 3 and Example 4) which shows the processing flow of a main control board, the acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED, and the notification of the correct answer push order by an image display device. It is a part of RWM, and is the figure which shows the storage area about the advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM and is a figure which shows the storage area about the total number of payouts. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of operation of an accessory. It is a part of RWM, and is the figure (modification example) which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process of updating the number of games, etc. using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process of updating the number of games, etc. without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of calculation process of the advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining the information to be displayed on the management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the management information on the acquisition number display LED. It is an external perspective view which shows the base part 1 of a slot machine 10. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board housed in the board case, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 3) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 4) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 5) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 6) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 7) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 8) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 9) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 10) on the main control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) on the sub-control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) on the sub-control board side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image display example (Example 1 to Example 4) of the image display device by the sub control board with respect to addition in AT (third embodiment). In the third embodiment, it is a figure explaining an increase in the number of AT games, a change of an effect, and the like. It is a time chart (Example 1 and Example 2) of an external signal in a fourth embodiment. It is a time chart (example 3) of an external signal in the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition in Example 1 of 5th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between RT transition and AT. It is a figure which shows Example 2 ((a)-(c)) of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition in 6th Embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, it is a figure which shows the type of the replay D group drawn by RT3, the winning combination, and the relationship between the push order and the display combination. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 4 and Example 5 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example 1 and the example 2 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example 3 and the example 4 of the eleventh embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an ending effect and the like. It is a figure which shows the number table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment. In the 14th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the extension of an advantageous section. In the fifteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and the freeze.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small winning combination) to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" is one. By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one conditional device (for example, replay) to be a lottery target fluctuates. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value peculiar to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, it is permissible that the total value of the winning probabilities of the replay is the same for one RT and the other RT.

The RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in the present embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal part is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal part is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be drawn and the winning probability are different between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during the special game. In this embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed for both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “combination” refers to a lottery target, and in the present embodiment, a condition device is drawn by lottery, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any of the conditional devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (having at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn includes a "character condition device" including one of "special roles (roles)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small role or a replay. ..
The "feature condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special role wins, SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special character; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special character; challenge bonus), which are devices that make it easy to win a small role, 1BB (Type 1 accessory continuous operation device; Type 1 big bonus) and 2BB (Type 2 accessory continuous operation device; Type 2 big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operation device (1BB) means a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the type 2 accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the type 2 special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either the winning of two wins or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. ..
Further, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later.
In the present embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided.
On the other hand, the "feature condition device" includes either RB, 1BB and 2BB in which the winning information can be carried over to the next game, and SB and CB in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later are provided.

When the winning information is won in the character condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information of the special role is until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops at the valid line. Will be carried over to the next game.
A game in which the winning information is not won in the character condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the winning character condition device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special role is not yet stopped at the effective line, that is, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is "inside". That is. In the present embodiment, the game won by the bonus condition device is included in "non-internal", but the game won by the bonus condition device may be included in "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts wins in a game in which the game result (combination of symbols that stop at the effective line) is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that does not shift (promote) to an advantageous RT or shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT wins a prize. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that refers to the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for the target symbol to stop at the effective line).
Then, in the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" is a game at the time of winning the push order bell (small winning combination B group, small winning combination C group), and duplicate replays (replay B group, replay C group). ) Corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, when the push order bell is won, the number of bells (small winning combination) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order is the higher bell (out of the duplicate winning bell group (small winning combination), the number of payouts is It may be called a bell (small role) in which it is most advantageous for the player to display the combination of the symbols such as the most small role.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong pressing order when the push order bell is won, the cheap bell may win a prize or the role may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop rolls (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled stitches") displayed when the winning combination is missed are referred to as "pattern symbols" in the present embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when the replay is duplicated (winning of the replay B group and the replay C group), the combination of different symbols is stopped and displayed according to the order in which the stop switch is pressed, but when the replay is won, no omission occurs (“PB = 1” described later). ").
In this case, the push order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shift to the RT with a higher replay winning probability, or the combination of symbols that maintain the RT with a high replay winning probability is "correct answer". It is called "push order" or "promotion push order".
On the other hand, the push order in which the combination of symbols that shift from the RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, the RT with a high probability of winning a replay) to the RT that is unfavorable (for example, the RT with a low probability of winning a replay) is stopped and displayed is "incorrect". It is called "push order" or "fall (demotion) push order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates the winning of small wins, the "instruction function" displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (higher bell) when the pressing order bell is won. This does not include displaying the correct push order for winning a favorable replay (a replay for shifting to a favorable RT or a replay for maintaining a favorable RT) when a duplicate replay is won.

In the following embodiments, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying the "advantageous operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" indicates the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , And to display the correct answer push order to win an advantageous replay at the time of duplicate replay winning.
It should be noted that showing the content of the "instruction" to the player is "display", and notifying the player of the content of the instruction is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".
Further, the "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not penalized for not following the "instruction". However, if the correct answer push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the higher bell may not win when the push order bell is won, or the unfavorable replay may win when the replay duplicate win is won.

Further, the "instruction function operating game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C). In the game) won in the group), it means a game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the instruction function operating game is one game. The instruction function operating game may also be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section", a "standby section", and an "advantageous section".
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later, which are peripheral boards (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that prohibits transmission to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not activate the instruction function). However, in addition to the lottery of the conditional device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
In the normal section, since the instruction function must not be activated, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board, and the instruction function can be used. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board described later.

When making a transition decision to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association with (associating) with the winning condition device.
Here, making a decision to shift to an advantageous section in association with the winning conditional device means determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the conditional device, and winning a specific conditional device. There is a case where a lottery is separately performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section on the condition of.

In the present embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the conditional device. In addition, the length (number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB, which will be described later, is won, the initial value is counted from the end of the 1BB game to become the advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it may be an advantageous section in which only one instruction function operation game (excluding the game in which the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won) is executed. is there.

Furthermore, when deciding the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device, the condition device that can decide to shift to the advantageous section (in the case of separately drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) , The condition device that is a condition for performing the lottery) is set so that it is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability.
Here, the "set value" determines the player's advantage, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the expected value of the ball output is higher). ) It is set. The set value is provided in six stages, for example, setting 1 to setting 6.
The "conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability (common to the setting)" refers to a conditional device having the same winning probability in all the settings.

It should be noted that it is only "possible" to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and when the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability is won. However, it does not mean that you must always shift to an advantageous section or always draw a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. Of course, it is possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even at the time of winning the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability.

On the other hand, the "conditional device having a setting difference in the winning probability (for each setting)" means that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, when the winning probabilities of all the set values are different, or when the winning probabilities of some set values are different from the winning probabilities of some other set values (for example, the winning probabilities of settings 1 to 5). Is "x" and the winning probability of setting 6 is "y (≠ x)").

Further, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content on the main control board. It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (advantageous operation mode) can be identified. The game in the advantageous section may also be referred to as a noticeable game. On the contrary, the game in the normal section and the game in the waiting section may be referred to as a non-notifying game.
However, the sub control board cannot output an effect contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not activated) in which the instruction function operating game can be executed can be obtained. In a game in which a conditional device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operating mode is won, at least one game is instructed to indicate the operating mode of the stop switch in which the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts is awarded. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are provided as so-called push order bell condition devices.
In the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01, which is a 9-card winning combination, always wins when the pushing order is correct, and the 1-card winning combination can be won when the pushing order is incorrect (may be missed).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is a three-card combination, always wins when the pushing order is correct, and the one-card winning combination always wins when the pushing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function activated game is executed is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Further, when the specified number is "3", the maximum number of payouts is "9" (at the time of winning the small winning combination 01).
Therefore, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is determined by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even in the game in which the condition device having an advantageous operation mode is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the "waiting section" refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be shifted to the advantageous section, the normal section may be shifted to the standby section, and the standby section may be further shifted to the advantageous section. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and after the end of the advantageous section, it always shifts to the normal section. The waiting section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, and corresponds to the special combination. A game in which a combination of symbols is displayed must be completed. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to operate the instruction function on the main control board or transmit a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and the signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that the section is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, there are cases where one instruction function operating game (excluding games won in the small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and cases where a predetermined number of games are executed. Have.
In the advantageous section in which the game is executed a predetermined number of times, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The end condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but for example, to perform an end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. You may.

Alternatively, the execution condition of the instruction function operating game is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the instruction function operating game is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the instruction function operating game is in the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the number of (remaining) games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the maximum number of games is set for the advantageous section, and when the maximum number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point even if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is reached (limiter). Operation), shift to the normal section.

Further, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if the condition device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of obtaining the maximum number of payouts (“9”) has never been won, or the winning is won. However, even if the winning combination (small combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation), and it is normal. Move to the section.

As mentioned above, although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment shall be defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even if it is decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device) must be linked to the conditional device with no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section must not differ depending on the set value.
b) The additional lottery for the advantageous section (even if it is decided without the lottery) must not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on the winning condition device, it must be linked to the condition device with no setting difference.

c) Special role in the normal section (meaning the special role that carries over the winning. The same shall apply hereinafter in this paragraph). During the internal or special role operation, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (may be decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device). ) Must not be done. In addition, during the special role, even during the advantageous section, an additional lottery for the advantageous section (may be decided without performing the lottery) must not be performed. Furthermore, when a condition device having a setting difference including a special combination is won in an advantageous section and the special combination is in operation, an additional lottery in the advantageous section (determined without performing a lottery) is performed during the special combination operation. Also) must not be done.
Here, in the past, it was common to hold an AT lottery even after being inside, so even if it is inside, wait for the AT winning while maintaining the inside without winning a special role. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable not to draw AT lottery inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special combination is won in the normal section and the inside is inside, it is determined that the normal section should not be changed to the advantageous section in the inside. Furthermore, if a special role is won in the advantageous section and it becomes inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is performed, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, the bet of the next game becomes possible). ), It is necessary to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to digest a certain number of games (via a precursor) from the time when the AT is won until the player is notified of the AT winning. It was. In addition, for example, in the case of drawing an AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the rare role is missed in the game, the player has won the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. Because I don't know, even if I won the AT by winning the rare role, I sometimes stopped the game before the AT winning was notified. After that, when another person plays a game on the platform, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (assigned by the previous player). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, it is displayed that the advantageous section is from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, until the bet of the next game becomes possible). Therefore, the above-mentioned problem does not occur.
As described above, in the past, the AT winning is notified after the AT is won (particularly after the AT precursor is passed), whereas in the present embodiment, in principle, until the next game can be bet. , The difference is that it is displayed that it is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Further, although the conventional notification of AT winning is only performed as a part of the production, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section). The lighting of the lamp, etc.) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to the entire gaming section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section during that period is "700", the ratio of advantageous sections is "70%".
As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value rounded down to the nearest whole number as a result of the calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired symbol to be stopped on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Shown.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line (up to the effective line). The inability to pull in) is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, "PB" indicates that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch). = 1 ".

Then, "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are so and a case where only a specific (some) reel is so for the combination.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reels of the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, the symbols are "PB = 1".

When the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When it is an eye, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by the expected number of medals to be paid out / the number of medals to be inserted. When it is "1", the status quo is maintained, and when it exceeds "1", the number of medals increases. It is a state, and when it is less than "1", the number of medals is reduced.
Further, the "expected value of the number of medals to be paid out" is calculated by the sum of "probability of winning the winning number x number of payouts" for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected value of the number of medals paid out) -the number of medals inserted". When the number of medals inserted is "3", if the number of medals paid out (expected value) is "3", the difference number is "± 0", and if the number of medals paid out (expected value) exceeds "3", When the difference number exceeds "0" and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than "3", the difference number is less than "0".

"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to 3 when the accessory is not operating (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is operating, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to two. To bet a medal, the actual medal is groomed and inserted from the medal slot, or the bet switch is operated to bet the stored medal.
The "game medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed game machine, for example, electronic information is used as the game medium. The "electronic information" means, for example, that when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played on the game machine. It can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the above.
In addition, the display of the accessory ratio, etc., which will be described later, can be applied not only to slot machines but also to bullet game machines, so the "game medium" includes not only medals but also game balls. Is done.

“Storage” means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned “bet”. The term "storage" may be used to include a bet, but in the present specification, the term "storage" is used to mean not to include a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of cards that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small role wins and a medal is paid out, the medal is accumulated. In addition, when medals are maintained and inserted from the medal insertion slot and the maximum number of medals has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when a medal is maintained and inserted from the medal insertion slot, it may be bet or stored.

It should be noted that the slot machine 10 "paying out" a medal to the player is equivalent to the player "acquiring" the medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". Therefore, there are a case of calling it "payout (number of sheets)" (for example, payout means 67) and a case of calling it "acquisition (number of sheets)" (for example, acquisition number display LED 78), both of which have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value having a "B" at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in a decimal number is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in a binary number and "10 (H)" in a hexadecimal number. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is, the suffixes of "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying the management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM83, a ROM84, and a subCPU85 is mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but is not limited thereto), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

Here, the blocker 45 is in a state of disallowing the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is won). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not performed.

On the further downstream side of the blocker 45, a closing sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and then further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the main control board 50, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 are electrically operated as operation switches operated by the player. Is connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game this time. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or a specified number) medals are provided.
Not limited to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Further, the specified number of the present embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, 2 medals are used. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, while the accessory is operating, two medals (specified number) can be inserted at one time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b.

Further, the start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is a switch provided by three corresponding reels 31 (left, middle, right) and operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the checkout switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when refunding (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other. In No. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay board, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at positions that the player can always see. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display board 75, and a plurality of display boards 75 such as display boards 75A, 75B, ... Are provided, and any display board 75 is provided. It suffices that any LED 76 to 78 is provided in the above.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED76, the advantageous section display LED77, the acquisition number display LED78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a plan view.
Further, in FIG. 2, a display board 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the stored number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point, which is a dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). Has been done.
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. It is mounted on the 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the stored number display LED76 is "00". Here, when one medal is cared for, the one medal is bet for the game. If two more medals are added, three medals will be bet for the game (when the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal slot 43, the blocked medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) with a medal payout wins and a medal corresponding to that role is paid out, priority is given to the actual payout of the medal from the payout port, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is used. The medals are stored. For example, when the number of stored cards before winning a winning combination is "10" and the winning number of 9 cards is won, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout slot. For example, when the number of medals stored is "47" before the winning combination and 9 medals are paid out by winning the winning combination of 9 medals, 3 medals are stored and the number of stored medals becomes "50", which exceeds "50". Six cards will be paid out from the payout slot.

Further, when the replay is won, the medals are not stored or paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game is automatically bet for the replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Then, since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing the replay, the medal cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed after that.

In addition, in the "Rules for Approval of Game Machines and Type Approval, etc. (hereinafter, simply referred to as" rules ")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the valid line, the condition device for the replay is used. It is interpreted as an operation, not a "winning". However, in the present application (the present specification, etc.), the replay is also treated as one of the roles (replay role), and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the effective line, which is referred to as "replay winning".

Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be turned on during that time during the advantageous section. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by confirming the lighting / extinguishing state of the advantageous section display LED 77.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player finishes the game and has a storage medal (for example, when "10" is displayed on the storage number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46, but at that time, It can be easily confirmed by the off state of the advantageous section display LED 77 that the section is not in the advantageous section. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the intention of the player even though the section is in the advantageous section (or the advantageous section from the next game).

Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquisitions of the player) when the winning combination is won, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits in the same manner as the stored number display LED 76.
The display of the acquired number display LED78 is "00" when there are no medals to be paid out, but for example, when the 9-card combination described later wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 is It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the error number "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the advantageous operation mode by operating the instruction function. Note that the advantageous push order notification when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as "operation of the instruction function", and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is "notification of the push order". It is called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous push order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Further, the push order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, for example, information such as "= 1" in FIG. 20, is referred to as "push order instruction information". That is, when the instruction function is activated, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed in a transparent board case 16 and sealed for security reasons. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be opened) unless the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed. In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) are shown so as to be transparent without being blocked by the board case 16. The crimped portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers showing proof that it is a regular main control board 50, a serial number, an opening record of the crimped portion 16a, etc. are affixed, but these stickers may obstruct the view. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to be present.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which is an LED that displays the current set value when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can also be used as, for example, the back side of the front door, the stored number display LED 76, or the acquired number display LED 78.

The digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, one digit housing is shown in FIG. 3A.
It is preferable to design the size of width m1 × height n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is used as one horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design the size of width m2 × height n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), the number of main control boards 50 is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. However, each board may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the entire main control board 50 in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control boards 50 are two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector capable of directly connecting the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and a harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
Further, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

Further, in the management information display LED 74, in addition to the case where the management information display LED 74 is arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), for example, the digits 6 and 7 are arranged in the upper row as in Example 2 of (b). , Digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9, segments A to G, and segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (7 pieces) form a so-called 7-segment display. ..

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segment of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, among the digits 2, the segments A to G form the lower digit 7-segment of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, each of the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

Further, among the digits 5, the segments A to G form the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when only the 7-segment is lit, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7-segment and the segment DP are lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is fixed during the setting change.

Segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Further, segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 among the management information. The segment DPs of digits 6-9 are unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Further, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and the confirmation can be facilitated.

Further, FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".
Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 2 and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on during the advantageous section, the segment data is "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of the digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thereby, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 or the like of a symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cared for and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “shoot portion”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the medal by the payout sensor 37. Has been done. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, when the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Will be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains ON, it is detected that the medal is jammed.

Further, the power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when the set value is changed. For example, the set value is added by "1" each time the setting is changed. In this embodiment, the set value has settings 1 to 6, and during the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set value changes from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → It switches from "1" to ... One of the set values is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the reset switch 14 is turned on, the reset, that is, the initialization process is performed, and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Further, the door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal plate 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, and opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. External signals, medal insertion signals, medal payout signals, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect (information) during the game and the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Send the information (control command) required for the output of the production.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined pattern. The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window 17) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the top of the reel 31, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, and It displays game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired cards, etc., when the character is operating or in an advantageous section).
Further, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code which is the player's game history), or when the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. It is used when doing so.

Subsequently, the roles of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that the symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to the "blank" is displayed.
The "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

Further, FIG. 6A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door; not shown) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design). It is a figure which shows (a display line which displays a combination).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31). Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 6B illustrates the designation of the symbol position in the present specification. In the present specification, the symbol positions at the time of stop that can be seen from the display window 17 are referred to as "upper", "middle", and "lower" in order from the top for each reel 31, and if it is the left reel 31, they are "upper left" respectively. , "Left middle row", "Left lower row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols that can be seen from the display window 17.

Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) that is an arrangement line of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped and forms a combination of symbols, and is a symbol corresponding to any combination. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In this embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. There is.

The invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among the symbol combination lines, and even if the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops at that line, the profit is given according to the combination. This is a line that does not pay out medals. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not the target of establishing the combination of symbols in the first place.

Further, conventionally, slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs depending on the number of medals inserted have been known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is 1, the number of effective lines is 1, when the number of medals inserted is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3, and when the number of medals inserted is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play the game, and in all the games, one line shown in FIG. 6 (A) becomes an effective line. There is no change in the number of effective lines depending on the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 6 (A).

7 to 12 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (combinations included in the condition device drawn by the combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols in the present embodiment. In addition, although it is not a combination, FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 as a combination of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won (numbers "101" to "101" to "120").

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into a special role, a replay (replaying role), and a small role.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all reels 31 are stopped, if the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped at the effective line (the winning combination is won, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 7 to 12, the "specified number 3" displayed on the number of payouts and the like indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not operating, that is, the number of inserts during the normal game). , "Specified number 2" indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of inserted cards during the special game). For example, the replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the replay is performed with the specified number of three cards, and the "-" of the specified number of two cards indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, the numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (roles). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role that shifts from a normal game to a special game.
If you win 1BB, you will not be paid out medals in this game, but from the next game, you will shift to the 1BB game, which is equivalent to a special game (operation of the character).
During the 1BB game (when the character is activated), the ball output rate is set to exceed "1", so that medals can be expected to be obtained more than when the character is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. ..

In addition, the replay (replay role) is a role that enables the replay to maintain the number of medals inserted in the game this time (automatically bet the medals).
As shown in FIG. 7, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13").
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, if a prize is won in a specific RT, will be transferred to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when the replay 02 wins in RT2, the game shifts to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when the replay 03 wins in RT3, the game shifts to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are firstly used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate. Replay A replay included in B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replays B2, B3, C2, or C3 are won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the effective line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as a rare replay and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.
Further, the replay 06 is a replay drawn by lottery during the operation of 1BB, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). Small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that win a prize in the correct push order when the push order bell is won, which will be described later. In addition, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the cheap bells) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelons or cherries).
Further, the small winning combinations 39 and 40 are small winning combinations that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the accessory is activated.

As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the winning combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pressing order is incorrect when the push order bell is won. It is a combination of symbols. Further, the pattern symbol is a symbol that shifts RT (shifts to RT2 in this embodiment) when the combination of the symbols stops at the effective line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are made to appear without fail when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. However, other combinations of symbols (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop at the effective line in the game in which the combination is won, the combination that is carried over to the next game and the combination that is not carried over is defined. ..
The carry-over role is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, the winning information of the 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until the 1BB wins.

On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, while the small roles and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. When a small winning combination or replay is won in the lottery of the conditional device, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which these winning combinations are won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. , The right to the winning combination will be extinguished.

When starting the game, the player inserts the medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or takes care of the medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the combination lottery means 61 draws a combination, and all the motors 32 are driven and controlled to drive and control all the reels. It is controlled to rotate 31. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to be performed.

Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) a condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
Further, "winning of the condition device" is also referred to as a winning combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and the winning condition device.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the condition device lottery table described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices drawn by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the description of the condition device will be mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment is a "character condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles that can carry over the winning information to the next game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device including either a small win or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition device numbers "1" and "2".
The character condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the character condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBA, and the character condition device number "2" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0", and the winning and replay condition device numbers are "1".
On the other hand, when 1BBA is won alone, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and the small winning combination are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are duplicated, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number. Is "26".
If 1BB and a small win or replay are won in duplicate, the prize for the small win or replay is prioritized in this game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). In addition, since the winning of a small role or replay is valid only in this game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition devices will be described.
The condition device number "0" corresponds to a non-winning combination (so-called loss).
Further, the replay A of the condition device number "1" is a single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of the push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers "2" to "4" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers "5" to "7" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "general"). Each of the above (referred to as "replay C group") is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of the replays 01 or 02. Then, the type of replay to be won is set to be different according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the push order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins in the case other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In the case of duplicate replay winning, the replay (replaying role) wins regardless of the push order, so there is no concept of high / low medals. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won in RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 at the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
Further, when the replay C1 is won in the RT3, the RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 at the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT is dropped (demoted) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning Replay 03.

The replay D of the condition device number "8" is a single win of the replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of the push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number "9" is a duplicate winning of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rare replays. In particular, in the present embodiment, if a lottery is drawn at RT1 and Replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is attached to a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is independently elected. Then, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (PB = 1).
Further, in FIGS. 14 to 15, the small combinations B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small combination B group") of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push order bells. , Small win 01 (9 bells, 9 wins) and at least one of small wins 03-34 (1 win).

When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 01, which is a high bell (9 bells, 9 winning combination), is awarded with "PB = 1" in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, the small winning combination 03, which is a cheap bell (single combination), depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There are cases where ~ 34 wins a prize and cases where none of the small wins wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to omission).

In FIG. 16, the small combinations C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small combination C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes, as in the above small combination B group. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a duplicate winning including a small winning combination 02 (3 bells, 3 playing cards) and a small winning combination 03-10 (1 card winning combination).
When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 02, which is a high bell (3 bells, 3 bindings), wins a prize according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 with "PB = 1" when the correct answer is pressed. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answering order, "PB = 1" and one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 which is a cheap bell (one-card winning combination) wins a prize. Therefore, when the small winning combination C group is won, unlike when the small winning combination B group is won, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (missing). Not limited to this, there may be a case where none of the small wins is won.

When the small role B group is won, 9 cards will be paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, the in (number of input) and out (number of payout) will be 9 and the difference in this game. The number of sheets is "+6". Therefore, the condition device is such that the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, and the number of medals decreases when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, 3 cards will be paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, 3 cards will be paid out (number of input) and 3 cards will be paid out (number of payouts). The difference in the number of sheets is "± 0 sheets". Therefore, when the push order is correct, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one), the number of medals is reduced.

It should be noted that the reason why both the push order bells for paying out 9 pieces and the push order bells for paying out 3 pieces in the correct push order are provided in order to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the probability that one winning combination will be won is 25% when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when the pattern pattern is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination C group is won, one winning combination is awarded with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different numbers of payouts depending on whether the answer is correct or incorrect, and setting the winning probability appropriately, the payout rate can be set in an appropriate range. become.

The small winning combination D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single winning of the small winning combination 35, and is set to "PB ≠ 1".
Further, the small winning combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small winning combination E2 of the conditional device number "28" correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry) as in the above small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a duplicate winning combination including the small winning combination 37 in addition to the above small winning combination 36 and 38. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, two winning combinations (small winning combination 36 or 38) will be won regardless of the push order.

The small winning combination F of the condition device number "29" is a winning combination that is drawn only during the operation of 1BB (during the 1BB game), and is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 01 to 39. When the small role F is won, the small role 39, which is a 10-card role, wins with "PB = 1".
The small winning combination G of the condition device number "30" is a winning combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning of the small winning combination 40. When the small role G is won, the small role 40, which is a 9-card role, wins with "PB = 1".

17 and 18 are winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device is drawn by the combination lottery means 61, and show the number of the accessory condition devices and the winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a figure. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by "65536" gives the winning probability. For example, the number of units for which 1 BBA is independently won is set to "20" and "10" ("30" in total) in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a table of number of condition devices that are common to the settings and that can be determined to shift to the advantageous section, or that the addition of the advantageous section is executed (or the additional lottery can be performed).
Here, "common setting" means that there is no setting difference, that is, the setting 1 to the setting 6 have the same numerical value.
Then, when the condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (decision to add during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous section) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides not to add during the advantageous section). It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, "Δ" means that the advantageous section is decided to be added, and "x" means that the advantageous section is not added.
In FIG. 17, “○” determines to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” determines to add the advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “○” indicates It may mean that a lottery is performed whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 18 shows a conditional device and a number thereof that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to the time when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. 18 In the winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add the advantageous section.
Although the number of settings 1 and 6 is typically shown in FIG. 18, in reality, as described above, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6 and is set. The number of places for each value is specified.

In FIGS. 17 and 18, since the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal part, it is drawn in the non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small winning combination D, E1 or E2 may be elected independently. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn by RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of small wins D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of small wins E1 in RT4 is "1030". The total number of small winning combinations E2 in RT4 is "310" to "370".
Further, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section or add an advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB. There is nothing.

In addition, Replay D is drawn only while 1BB is in operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, if Replay E is won in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set it so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn only in RT1.
Further, the small winning combination D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small winning combination F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, and are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

Further, in FIG. 17, the total number of single winnings of 1BBA is "30", but in the present embodiment, the number of placements "20" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "10" that decides not to shift. That is, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "20" is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is also won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "10" is won, the advantageous section will not be won.

In addition, when 1BBA is won alone during the advantageous section, it is decided that the advantageous section will be added regardless of whether the number is "20" or "10".
Similarly, the number of single winnings of the small winning combination E1 is "1000" in total, but in the present embodiment, the number "250" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "750" that decides not to shift to.

Not limited to this, when the single winning number of the small winning combination E1 is set to one placement number "1000" (not divided into the placement number "250" and the placement number "750") and the small winning combination E1 is won. In addition, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by a separate lottery. For example, there is a 25% chance of deciding to move to an advantageous section and a 75% chance of not deciding to move to an advantageous section. In this way, a number that wins the advantageous section and a number that does not win the advantageous section may be provided from the beginning, but the number itself is set to one value, and when the number is won, the section shifts to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be held to decide whether or not to do so.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when the small winning combination D or E1 is won, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section is not added (“* 3” in FIG. 17). ..

In FIG. 18, when 1 BBB is won alone or when 1 BBB and small winning combination D are won in duplicate, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after the transition to RT1).
The small winning combination E2 has a case where the winning is duplicated with 1BBB and a case where the winning is single, but neither of them makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, a decision regarding the advantageous section may be made for both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices of the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group have the same settings, but they are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are added in the advantageous section. I don't decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when the condition devices for these replays are won, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group, the positions of the setting 1 and the setting 6 are slightly different (for example, "1" is different), and the replay A, the replay B group, and the like. And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, the replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group all have a setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but the number is the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of "special combination and small combination" in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the winning probability of 1BB and the small combination is set higher in the setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, RT3 has the highest probability of winning a replay. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the number of medals is increased by the operation of the instruction function when the push order bell is won, but also the number of medals is small due to the replay winning. ..

Further, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are all set in the condition device having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small winning combination A is "250", and the number difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (overall) is "240 (20 x 12)". ". Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger difference in number than the small winning combination B group. As a result, by setting the number of small winning combinations A having no winning difference according to the pushing order to a larger value, it is possible to surely provide a difference in the payout rate according to the set value.
Further, since the combination of the symbols that can be won when the small winning combination A is won and the combination of the symbols that can be won when the push order is correct when the small winning combination B is won are set to be the same (described later), the small winning combination A is set. The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum number of payouts is 9 when the specified number is 3, and at least 1 instruction function operating game in which the number of payouts is 9 (maximum number of payouts with the specified number of 3) during the advantageous section. Need to run twice. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one instruction function operating game (small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group is won). It is possible to reduce the expected number of games in the advantageous section that ends only with (excluding the games played). Furthermore, even though it is an advantageous section that ends after executing a predetermined number of games, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small winning combination B group has never been won during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when any of the conditional devices is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination included in the conditional device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal medium game, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, the small winning combination 10, the small winning combination 11, the small winning combination 18, the small winning combination 19, and the small winning combination are included. The seven winning flags of the winning combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other winning combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, the winning of small roles and replays other than 1BB is not carried over, so even if the small role or replay is won in this game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the game ends this time. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, when the winning flag of 1BB is won in this game and the winning flag related to the winning 1BB is turned on once, the on state is maintained until the 1BB is won, and the winning state is maintained. It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins 1BBA and the small winning combination D more than once, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and both roles may not win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept on and the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 is turned off regardless of whether the small winning combination 35 wins or does not win.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when 1BBA is not won in this game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. ..
Furthermore, when the small role A1 is won in the next game, in addition to the 1BBA that has carried over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and if 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag of is kept on, and the winning flag of the small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
In either the advantageous section or the normal section, the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only during the advantageous section, for example. The push order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except for transmitting the push order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to the replay A is "A0", and the push order instruction number corresponding to the replay C3 is "A3". The push order instruction number includes "A0" to "A3".

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number "A0" does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not cause an advantage / disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
Further, the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous push order corresponding to the push order instruction number "A2" is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the push order for winning the replay 02 (the push order for promoting RT).
Further, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the push order in which the replay 01 is won (maintains RT).
Similarly, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the small win B group is set to the push order in which the small win 01 (9 sheets) is won.
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set to the pushing order in which the small winning combination 02 (3 sheets) is won.

Further, in FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the push order instruction information to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed. Shown. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers "A" and "0" to "3" correspond to the display of "=" and "0" to "3" of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When "=" is displayed, the segments D and G in FIG. 4 of the 7-segments are turned on (see FIG. 26 described later). Further, when the push order instruction number is "A0", no display may be made (no segment is lit).

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub control board 80, and in the present embodiment, it is the correct answer pressing order to be displayed on the image display device 23.
The "operation of the instruction function" means the display using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub control board 80 is the "operation of the instruction function" of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device "11" is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and when the instruction function is activated, "= 1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. To. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image of a content such as "1 ○○" that the player can understand that the left first stop is performed.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small winning combination A is as follows.
When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 wins regardless of the pushing order, so there is no advantageous pushing order. However, during the advantageous section, any one of "A1" to "A3" is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selectivity is "1/3" respectively. By setting in this way, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the push order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the small winning combination A has been won or the small winning combination B group has been won in the game. This setting is for the following reasons.

As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number of places) of the small winning combination A is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 has won a prize in the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a capture, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the dummy push order instruction information is displayed. Of course, it is not impossible to guess the set value by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 won a prize in the game in which the instruction function is activated, but the number of times the small winning combination 01 won in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. More trials are required than when counting and guessing the set value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the push order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1BB is won during the advantageous section and the inside is inside, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, in the advantageous section and inside (during the game section in which the advantageous section is not added), the small winning combination E1 is won, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (the combination of the symbols expected to be added in the advantageous section). When a certain middle cherry) stops, it may give the player the impression of wasting money. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop when the small winning combination E1 is won, the so-called middle cherry does not stop as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. Since the number of small winning combinations 36 or 38 that can be won when the small winning combination E1 is won is two, there is no disadvantage to the player even if the right first stop is instructed.

Further, as described above, the advantageous section has a maximum number of games set, and is set within 1500 games in the present embodiment. Therefore, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In the case of having such playability, for example, if the small winning combination E1 is won when the game is close to 1500 games in the advantageous section and the middle cherry is displayed, the player expects the addition of the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small winning combination E1 is won, the middle cherry is not displayed as in the case of winning inside. , Activate the instruction function to display the right first stop.

When the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if the middle cherry is displayed when the game is 1400 or more in the inside or from the start of the advantageous section, the player may be misunderstood. Therefore, in this case as well, the instruction function is activated. , Right first stop is displayed.
However, not limited to this, when the small winning combination E2 is won, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not made in the first place, the middle-stage cherry may be displayed without operating the above-mentioned instruction function.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of drawing the condition device, it is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself to the sub control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in this game.

On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is predetermined. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the production group number corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group is defined as "5". The production group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7", respectively.

Therefore, when the main control board 50 wins the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group as a result of the lottery of the condition device, "5" is selected as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number "5" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is "5", it can know that in this game, it has won any of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group. it can. As a result, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the production group number "5" has been won, or even when the sub-control board 80 has won any of the small winning combination B groups in the game, the correct answer is pushed. You can't know the order. Then, in the present embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but is not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 may output the fact that the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won and the correct push order corresponding to the push order instruction number as an effect. it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces the effect that the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group (bell) is won, and the correct answer is pushed in order. Cannot be output as a production.

Further, even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, the push order instruction number when the replay B1 is won is "A1" (left first), and the push order instruction number when the small winning combination C1 is won is "A1" (left first). In each case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

However, when the replay B1 is won, the production group number "2" is transmitted, and when the small winning combination C1 is won, the production group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when the production group number "2" is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using, for example, the blue color indicating the replay, and when the production group number "5" is transmitted, for example, the bell. It is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using the yellow color indicating.

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the game this time after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. It is controlled to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in the game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the effective line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination other than the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) is not stopped on the effective line. ..

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (designs)). Means within range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage (on the effective line), the left stop switch 42 is operated four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "bell". Up to "B" is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, in the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (stopping bitterness) to No. 5 (4 frames) are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.

However, not limited to the above, it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 from the next symbol of the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage, the next symbol, that is, the second "blank" is started. Up to the 6th "replay", which is the symbol 4 frames ahead, is the symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.
In the following description, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated will be described as 4 frames.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. The symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of, the design related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops at the effective line, the reel is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, it is controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in the game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Controls the pull-in stop of the symbol with the highest priority.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), what is it? The stop position is predetermined, such as controlling the movement of only the symbol (with how many frames) and stopping the symbol at the lower left.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols on all reels 31. As a result, the "replay" of all reels 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1".
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".

Further, in the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "cherries" on the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB = 1".
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the right reel 31, four "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is "PB = 1".

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "cherries" are arranged at Nos. 3, 8 and 13, so they are not arranged at "PB = 1".
Similarly, for the "watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 have a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a "PB = 1" arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and winning the replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop at the effective line.

The replay A table is used at the time of replay A winning (single winning of replay 01), and the reel is used so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position of 31 is defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and the replays 02 to 06 described later are all the reels 31 in the “PB = 1” arrangement. Therefore, when a replay is won, the winning replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the duplicate winning replays) is always won.

The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in a game in which the replay B1 table is used, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the lower left row at the time of the first left stop ("PB = 1" as described above). In this case, "replay" stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, "cherry" is stopped in the upper right row. In this case, "replay" stops at the lower right. As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Cherry" stops on the effective line, and Replay 02 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left stage"-"middle middle stage"-"lower right stage".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the upper middle row. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). At this time, as described above, "replay" stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" stops on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left"-"middle upper"-"upper right".

In the game in which the replay B1 table is used, the control is the same at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the first stop at the middle.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table when the replay B2 is won and the replay B3 table when the replay B3 is won, the replay 02 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 01 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as described above.

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control of stopping the replay 01 at the effective line at the time of the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle right. As a result, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" stops on the effective line, and the replay 03 is won. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control is the same at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the first stop at the middle.
Furthermore, for the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is won and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is won, the replay 01 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as above. ..

The replay D table is used in the game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 06 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is a fixed one. Replay 06 is "PB = 1".
Further, the replay E table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay E, and the reel is used so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop position of 31 is defined. In this case, either Replay 04 or 05 can be stopped at "PB = 1".

The small winning combination A table is used in the game when the small winning combination A is won, and the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 01 is "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. When "Black 7 / Watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops at "Left middle tier"-"Middle middle tier"-"Right middle tier".

The small winning combination B1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, one of the small combination 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) is played. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

In the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the left first stop (when the push order is correct) is the same as that of the small winning combination A table, so the explanation is omitted.
Even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the same stop control as the small winning combination A table is performed when the push order is correct.
As a result, when the small winning combination A is won and when the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle tier"-"middle middle tier"-"right middle tier" is displayed. "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the push order is correct when the small winning combination B group is won.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, if the instruction function is activated by the dummy as described above, the player can determine whether the small winning combination A is won or the small winning combination B group is won. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since there is a setting difference in the number of winnings of the small winning combination A, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of winnings of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop rolls are the same when the small role A is won and when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A, so the set value. Can no longer be guessed.

Further, more specifically, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations having different payout numbers are elected in duplicate.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped at the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all the symbols that make up the winning combination of symbols on the effective line" (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number of sheets priority". , Or "number priority" to stop and control the reel 31.
Here, "number of sheets priority" means that among the combinations of symbols that have been won in duplicate, the symbols of the reel 31 that constitutes the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts are preferentially stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. To say. Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (9).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the reel 31 are stopped at the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is the largest.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, all the middle reels 31 related to the winning winning combination cannot be stopped at the effective line at the same time. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols of the winning small winning medium reel 31, whereas there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the push order is correct, and the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the push order is incorrect. When the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of reels, the small winning combination 01 (9-card winning combination) is configured so that one winning combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number of sheets is prioritized in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and the number is prioritized in another pressing order (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). Depending on the number of sheets, priority is given to the number of sheets or the number of sheets.

In the above example, when the number is prioritized at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, it stops at the effective line. The maximum number of possible combinations of symbols is two each. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" of the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Can be made to.
Here, it is assumed that the "bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "bell A" or "bell C" at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, "bell A" is arranged at Nos. 15 and 0, and "Bell C" is arranged at Nos. 18. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to the 19th and the 0th, the "bell A" or the "bell C" can be stopped at the effective line. When the numbers are 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell A" or "Bell C" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "Bell A" can be stopped without stopping "Bell C", the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are Nos. 11 to 19 and 0. When is, "Bell A" is always stopped at the effective line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" makes it possible to display the pattern symbol described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if "Bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped).

On the other hand, when the "bell A" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell A", the symbol of the left reel 31 is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set before the third stop on the right, "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 4 to 13. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, it becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Further, in the case of "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 18 at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, "Bell B" is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and "Red 7" is arranged at Nos. 7. Therefore, when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, and other than that. At some times, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped randomly (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell B" or "Red 7" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10. Always stops "Bell B" at the active line.

On the other hand, when the "bell B" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell B" is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set before the third stop on the right, "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell B". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" at the effective line, the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14 to 18 or 19 to 3. For example, "Bell B" can be stopped, and "Bell B" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Further, in the case of "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.

Next, the case where the small winning combination B1 is won and the right first stop is described will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is two each. Becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since the "bell A" or "bell B" of the right reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, the "bell A" or "bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell A" or "bell C" related to the small winning combination 03 or 19 at the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A". ..
Further, when "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 5 to 14. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, it becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line at the first stop of the right reel 31. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 26 at the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped. Stop "Bell B". Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B1 is won, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and both the left and right reels 31 have "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right when the small role B1 is won (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbol are the same as those at the time of the first stop.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 wins with "PB = 1". On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or right (when the push order is incorrect), one card wins with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". ..

When the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B2 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 04 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible, and "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B2 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B3 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, in the same manner as above, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped when stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C" in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B3 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B4 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop, but here, the same as above. Stop "Bell B". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped when stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B4 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B4 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 07)
Will be one of.

Hereinafter, detailed description of each of the small winning combination B5 table to the small winning combination B12 table at the time of winning the small winning combination B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small winning combination B5 table used when the small winning combination B5 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small winning combination 03 or the small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small winning combination B6 table used when the small winning combination B6 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B7 table used when the small winning combination B7 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the push order is correct, and there is a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B8 table used when the small winning combination B8 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small winning combination B9 table used when the small winning combination B9 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins when the right first stop is when the push order is correct, and when the push order is incorrect, there is a probability of "1/4" for the small win 03 or small win. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small winning combination B10 table used when the small winning combination B10 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B11 table used when the small winning combination B11 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins when the right first stop is when the push order is correct, and when the push order is incorrect, there is a probability of "1/4" for the small win. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B12 table used when the small winning combination B12 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop, which is the correct answer in the push order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

As is clear from the above, the one-card winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is the small winning combination 03 to the small winning combination 10. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device will not win a prize. The setting in this way is related to the one-card combination that can be won when the small combination C group, which will be described later, is won.

The small winning combination C1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 02 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination C1 is won, any of the small combination 03 to 10) is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is defined.

Small win C1 (same for small wins C2 and C3, which will be described later) When the push order is correct, the small win 02 (3 wins) will be won by prioritizing the number of coins, as in the case of winning the small win B group. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 02 is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. .. Therefore, when the push order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small winning combination C1 is won, when the pushing order is incorrect (at the time of the first stop in the middle or the right), the number of winning winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) is controlled by giving priority to the number of pieces. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of the symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10 is a combination of the symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small winning combinations 03 to 10, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B" in each reel 31, and either "bell A" or "bell B" can be used. Even if it is stopped, the condition of quantity priority is satisfied. In particular, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small winning combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol that gives priority to the number does not change. Further, in all reels 31, "bell A" or "bell B" is "PB = 1" in total of the two symbols. Therefore, any one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 can always be won.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, the small winning combination 02 (3 cards) wins when the pushing order is correct (“PB = 1”), and when the pushing order is incorrect, either small winning combination 03 to 10 (1). The card combination) wins (“PB = 1”), and there is no omission (stopping of the pattern pattern) as in the case of winning the small combination B group.

The small winning combination C2 table and the small winning combination C3 table used at the time of winning the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are the same as those of the small winning combination C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop is in the correct answer pushing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is won, the right first stop is in the correct answer pushing order. Since the stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combination 03 to 10 is the same as when the small winning combination C1 is won, the explanation is omitted.

Therefore, a 1-card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won, and a 1-card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination C group is won. Small roles 03 to 10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group has been won in the game just by looking at the winning of the small winning combination 03-10.

The small winning combination D table is used in the game when the small winning combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small winning combination D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 35 is a set of "watermelons". The "watermelon" has a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a "PB = 1" arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops at the effective line, the "watermelon" stops at the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line and the small winning combination 35 is missed.

The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. Is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes a so-called middle-stage cherry stop type (so that the "cherry" stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

It should be noted that the winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combination 36 and 38 (furthermore, the small winning combination 37 is included when the small winning combination E2 is won, which will be described later). The number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by an arbitrary stop control determined in advance. Therefore, it is controlled to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the time of the left or middle first stop, and to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the right first stop.

In FIG. 5, the “cherries” on the left reel 31 are Nos. 3, 8, and 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "cherry" is stopped in the middle left row, "blank" or "red 7" is stopped in the effective line in the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped in the lower left row at the first left stop ("Cherry" is stopped in the middle left row), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line ("PB = 1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" (4 symbols combined, "PB =" 1 ”) is stopped at the effective line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
Also, when the 2nd or 12th "blank" is stopped in the lower left row when the left reel 31 is stopped ("cherry" is stopped in the middle left row), the same as above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "" Stop "Blue 7" or "Cherry" at the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, stop either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" at the effective line. .. As a result, the small role 36 is won.

Stop control is also performed at the time of the first middle stop in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have a case where the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 stops at "PB = 1", and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop (for the left reel 31). "PB ≠ 1").
However, if "Red 7" or "Blank" cannot be stopped in the lower left row at the time of the first stop on the left or middle, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped at "PB = 1". In this case, the stop type is "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank", and the small winning combination 38 wins.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized when the right first stop is made. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank" stops, and the small winning combination 38 wins with "PB = 1". ..
Further, at the time of the first right stop, even if the "cherry" can be stopped at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "cherry" is not stopped at the left middle stage, and the "bell A" or "bell" at the lower left stage. Stop "B" (in this case, "cherry" is not stopped in the middle left).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the reel 31 is used so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 (or the small winning combination 37) on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It defines the stop position of.
Therefore, since the small combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped in the lower left stage (when the middle stage cherry is stopped), "Replay" is set to the effective line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 is won or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small winning combination F table is used in the game when the small winning combination F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small winning combination 01 to 39 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is a fixed one.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small winning combination F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. As a result, the small role 39 is always won. In addition, in the left reel 31, since the arrangement of "PB = 1" is the sum of the two symbols of "cherry" or "bell C", the small winning combination 39 wins with "PB = 1".

The small winning combination G table is used in the game when the small winning combination G is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 40 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. .. Since the small winning combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with "PB = 1" for all reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when the game when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone is won), or when the 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and the stop control of the reel 31 is used. Within the range of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped at the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBA is determined so as not to stop at the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pressed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the game is won when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (1BBB is won alone), or when the 1BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and the reel 31 is used. Within the range of the stop control of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped at the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBB is not stopped at the effective line. The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is "PB ≠ 1" for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, "red 7" and "black 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in a game in which 1BB and a small role or replay are duplicated, or in a game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small role or replay is won in this game, the following stop control is performed. Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning small symbol. A stop control that gives priority to stopping the combination or replay symbol on the effective line can be mentioned. Note that the stop control for stopping both the 1BB and the small win or replay symbol on the effective line is up to the second stop, and at the time of the third stop, 1BB or the small win or replay is controlled to win a prize, and a plurality of stops are controlled. The role of is not duplicated.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning 1BB is selected. There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of.

Thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, when stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be stopped at the effective line at the same time, stop control for stopping at that position can be mentioned.

When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and the small winning combination or replay of “PB = 1” are won in duplicate (when they are winning at the same time), the winning 1BB symbol and the small winning combination or replay It is not necessary to control to stop both the symbol and the symbol on the effective line, and it is also possible to control so that only the small winning combination of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay is stopped on the effective line. Therefore, since the small winning combination E1 and E2 are "PB = 1", only the small winning combination E1 or E2 is obtained when the 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 of the present embodiment are duplicated or when the 1BBB and the small winning combination E2 are duplicated. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
When the reel 31 is stopped, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any combination (whether any combination has won a prize). Whether or not) is judged. The winning determination means 66 determines a symbol on the effective line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 wins the winning combination. , A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, when the replay wins a prize, the number of medals inserted in the game this time is controlled to be automatically inserted without paying out the medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at each game and when all reels 31 are stopped, and if it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. It is a thing.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the type (number) of the condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set when the stop display of the symbol combination or when the RT transition combination is won, that is, when all the reels are stopped (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all reels are stopped. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game that won 1BB. May be good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game in which 1BB was won.

Non-internal medium games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3. In addition, the internal medium game corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled to stay at RT3, but when a player makes a mistake in pressing the stop switch 42, he / she may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operating game (excluding the game that wins the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game in which the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, you may basically stay at RT3.

In the non-RT, RT1 to RT3 non-internal middle games, a lottery of the character condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in a game that wins 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB starts when the game is completely stopped this time, so in this case, RT4 (internal middle game) is not used.

RT4 will continue until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has won a prize in RT4, it determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation end condition of 1BBA is set so that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1BBA operation It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to 1BBB operation. If the transition is made during the operation of 1BBB, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out for each game, and if it determines that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the operation termination condition of 1BBB is satisfied. From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Replay is not included in the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, while 1BB is in operation, the replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, the more the replay D is won, the more the number of games during 1BB operation increases. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so that the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games in.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB ends when either the winning of two wins or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the operation of 1BBA is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games played in setting 6 is larger than that in setting 1 until the end condition (more than 150 cards) is reached during 1BBA operation. Therefore, during the operation of 1BBA in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the probability that the advantageous section is added is higher. Details on this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

When the RWM53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when the RWM53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM53 is initialized while the 1BB winning is carried over, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed. In the non-RT, the small winning combination B group is drawn, and if any of the small winning combination B groups is won and the winning small winning combination is missed, the pattern pattern is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in the case of non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process shifts to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the replay B group is won and the replay 02 wins, it is judged that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT3 from the next game.
On the other hand, in RT3, it continues until the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the replay 03 wins. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT2 from the next game.

As described above, in the normal section (and non-internal), most of them go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest. When 1BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition to RT4 (internal) from the next game is as described above.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section and the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning the replay C group Is activated, and the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. This prevents the vehicle from falling to RT2. In addition, when the small winning combination B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the replay B group while activating the instruction function as described above to win the replay 02. The push order is displayed and it is controlled to shift to RT3.
Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the instruction function is displayed until the pattern symbol is displayed. In a game in which the operation is possible (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function is not activated and the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of an instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-internal middle game.

Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is determined in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the specific condition device is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, at the same time, the advantageous section is selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-internal section, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the internal section.

Further, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination lottery result (winning conditional device), the winning of the conditional device having a setting difference cannot be a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section on condition that the condition device having common settings is won.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when a single BBA is won, there are cases where it is decided to shift to an advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number value included in the range of the number "20" is extracted from the number "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and the number "10". When the random number value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous interval. The same applies to the single winning of "1BBA + small winning combination D", "1BBA + small winning combination E1", and small winning combination E1.

Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in each case. In addition, when these condition devices are won, it is possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section, or to draw a lottery as to whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the advantageous sections are uniformly added.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the end condition other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the difference number, the number of winnings of the small winning combination B group, the number of times the instruction function is operated, etc.) may be set. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the section shifts to the advantageous section in which the end conditions are set as described below.
Specifically, for example, the following can be defined.
When 1BBA alone is won (number of places "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small winning combination D When winning multiple times (number of places "5"): Initial value is 1BB Counting after the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small winning combination E1 When multiple winnings (number of positions "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When the combination D is won alone (number of placements "50"): Advantageous section of 150 games with an initial value Small combination E1 When the single winning combination (number of placements "250"): Advantageous section of 100 games with an initial value, or one small combination Any of the advantageous sections ending by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be decided by lottery, or included in the range of the number "120" out of the number "250" When the random value is extracted, the initial value is set as an advantageous section of 100 games, and when the random value included in the range of the number "130" is extracted, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B once. It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premier feeling when the small role D is won, the number of games in the advantageous section when the small role D is won is set to a small number. It is set more than when the role E1 is won. The number of games in the advantageous section when the small winning combination E1 is won may be set to be larger than that when the small winning combination D is won.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA alone is won, the number of games played in the advantageous section is added by "30", and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of positions "250"). ) Adds "50" to the number of games, and "20" is added to the number of games when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of places "750"), and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of "1/4"("250" out of the total number of "1000"). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the middle cherry will be determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.
Contrary to the present embodiment, the setting 1 may be higher than the setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.

Further, 1BBA is a special combination in which the number of winnings is common to the setting (excluding the case where 1BBA and the small combination D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the number of winnings.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the setting is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference during the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small winning combination D, which have a setting difference in the advantageous section, are elected in duplicate and 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared while 1BBA is operating, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than in setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E2 is set in setting 1 in setting 1. Higher than. Therefore, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to pay out more than 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add an advantageous section when the replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times the replay D is won during the operation of 1BBA is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the higher the setting, the higher the setting. It is possible to make it easier for advantageous sections to be added.

Further, during the operation of 1BBA, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the advantageous section may be added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set that more than 150 sheets have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected value of the number of payouts per game during 1BBA operation is about "8.664" in setting 1 and about "8.557" in setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games in which the number of payouts reaches 150 is about "17.3" in setting 1 and about "17.5" in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to unconditionally add the advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section. be able to.
Further, during the operation of 1BBA, it may be set to add an advantageous section every time a certain number of games have elapsed. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section while 1BBB is operating.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed. Moves to RT2. That is, it does not go through RT1 after the operation of 1BBA is completed.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1 and stays in RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, the replay E is drawn by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if the RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after the end of the 1BBB operation, the probability of adding the advantageous section is higher than that after the end of the 1BBA operation. Then, if the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the instruction function is not activated in a game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is not activated. Wait until is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the small winning combination 01 wins a prize by activating the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won, and the pattern (unless there is a mistake in the pushing order). No design is displayed. Therefore, when the user shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, he / she can continue to stay at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. Not until the end of the advantageous section, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won, and after the predetermined number of games, the instruction function can be activated until the pattern symbol is displayed. For example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function may not be activated and the pattern may be waited until the pattern is displayed.

Further, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so as to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by the time when a predetermined timing arrives, and is other than the advantageous section (normally). When it is a section or a standby section), the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off.
First, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, a medal is awarded. Turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the medal insertion (bet) for the next game (after payout) becomes possible, and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated (payment processing operation) when holding a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the 1BB is stopped. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned on.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the conditional device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, for example, 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In a certain case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on (only when a standby section is provided) until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped.

On the other hand, if the special role is a special role such as SB or CB that is valid only in the winning game and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the winning condition device that includes only the small role or replay is selected. Similar to when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the above, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game becomes possible and the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77.
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, first, "from the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of this game (all). Until the reel 31 is stopped and the medal of the next game can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as "predetermined timing"). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when the small winning combination E1 is (independently) won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, it is always applied.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and small winning combination E1 are won in duplicate and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on this duplicate winning, the advantageous section is displayed by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (for example, when a standby section is not provided).

Therefore, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is uniformly displayed. When this is done, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section is based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination, it is uniformly decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device not including the special combination. As in the case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the lighting timing may be decided by lottery or the like.
Further, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, for example, other than the timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example. In the next game of the game in which the special role is won, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 is rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), etc. It may be.

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the waiting section ends in the next game of the game in which the special role is won). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game in which the special role can be won after the next game of the game in which the special role is won, at least a part of the reels 31 is rotated. It may be in the middle or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the waiting section ends in the game in which the special role can be won. ).

Here, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the 59th "Red 7"-"Cherry"-"Red 7" (FIG. 9) of the small winning combination 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "Red 7"-"Rotating"-"Red 7" has stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of winning 1BBA. Next, when the player aimed at the "cherry" when the middle reel 31 was stopped, but the "cherry" did not stop at the effective line (kicking control was controlled), the small winning combination E1 was won in the game. You can see that it is not. Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that the 1BBA is a single winning, and the 1BBA symbol is used in the next game of the game when the 1BBA is won. It becomes possible to push the combination of. That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a winning notification of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of loss (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, there is a tendency to perform continuous production (effect to incite whether or not 1BB is won) and then notify the winning of 1BB, but the advantageous section display LED77 is displayed by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such continuous production will be wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins the prize. To have.

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, 1BBA will not be won in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because the standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 At the time of winning the prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1 BBA has not been won twice.

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", the case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23) and the predetermined A case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one to use is, for example, sorted according to the number of "1BBA + small winning combination E1" at the time of winning, or when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section). It is possible to perform a lottery (two-stage lottery) as to whether or not the display LED 77 is immediately turned on (whether or not a standby section is provided). As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA has not been won twice, and the player's expectation can be continuously fueled.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB = 1", the small winning combination E1 is always the same regardless of whether the "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won or the small winning combination E1 is won alone. The small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to "PB ≠ 1". Then, when the small winning combination included in the condition device of the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB ≠ 1" and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination E1", the small winning combination E1 It is also possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing at the time of winning, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed when the small winning combination E1 is not won.

However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED77 is always used by the predetermined timing. May be turned on (always timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be turned on even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of the single winning of the small winning combination D and the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). Because it cannot be done), it becomes a so-called immediate notification, and the player's expectations cannot be fueled.
Therefore, as described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, there are two advantageous sections: an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won once. Set the type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the first small winning combination B group is elected, an effect that incites the degree of expectation (as a final result, whether or not it is an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted). By outputting (such as a continuous effect indicating the above), even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to fuel the expectations of the player even after that. This is because even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known at the time of lighting whether the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted.

Even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, if the advantageous section is not transferred, the advantageous section display LED77 does not light in the first place, so it is necessary to output a continuous effect (such as an effect that encourages whether or not to shift to the advantageous section). Absent.
Further, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is not set as one winning of the small winning combination B group (one instruction function operating game) or a predetermined number of games. It is also possible to determine the number of operations of the above by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, the segment data up to that point and the data obtained by ORing "10000000" may be stored in the RWM 53 as new data. As a result, the value corresponding to the segment DP becomes "1" in the segment data of the digit 2.

Further, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment include a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and as a method of lighting these digits, control can be mentioned as follows.
The main control board 50 executes "interrupt processing" every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process, in addition to the "(game progress) main process" which is a process of repeating each game. In this interrupt process, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission processing, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, dynamic lighting is executed for the digits 1 to 9 so that one digit is lit for each interrupt process. For example, in the current interrupt processing, only digit 1 is lit, and in the next interrupt processing, digit 2 is lit. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of once in nine interrupt processes. In addition to such dynamic lighting, static lighting in which signal lines are connected for each digit may be executed.

Therefore, when it is time to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of the digit 2 arrives due to the interrupt processing.

Further, in the game in which the instruction function should be activated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 obtains the number of acquisitions by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the "operation of the instruction function" in the present embodiment.

It is the instruction function operation game during the advantageous section
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C group is won (When the small winning combination B group is won, the pattern pattern is displayed, so the instruction function does not operate.)
2) RT2: When the replay B group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won 3) RT3: When the replay C group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won. ..

Further, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is operated as a dummy. When the small role A is won, the small role 01 wins regardless of the push order, so no matter which push order is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player, so even if a specific push order is displayed, the game It does not harm the justice of.
Specifically, when the small winning combination A is won, one of the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" may be selected by a lottery using a random number or the like.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won while approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the push order instruction number "A3" and displays the push order of the right first stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching.

In the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the advantageous section is not added when the small winning combination E2 is won. Therefore, when the small winning combination E2 in the advantageous section is won, it is always added. , Displaying the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that the advantageous section is added by displaying the middle cherry. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle cherry in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, either the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won. However, when the instruction function is activated, the right first stop is displayed and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is set to "1500 games". Therefore, for example, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes "1400 games" or more and the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won, the right first stop is displayed by activating the instruction function. ..
As described above, the "operation of the instruction function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle-stage cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the instruction function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the "operation of the instruction function", and the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games played for the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
The advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is digested, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section ends. In addition, some decrements are performed from the game that has shifted to the advantageous section, and some are performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, when the advantageous section counter 69a is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is not necessary to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time, and after the end of the 1BB game. It may be the one that sets the initial value.
Further, when an advantageous section is added during the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined to add the advantageous section, and when the number of additional games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to "55". Update to "85". Then, each time one game is digested, "84", "83", and so on are decremented one game at a time.

Further, when 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on the duplicate winning of 1BBA and small winning combination D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. Suspend counting by. In this embodiment, the setting in this way enables the addition of the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBA (excluding the one based on the duplicate winning of 1BBA and the small winning combination D), but the addition of the advantageous section is possible during the operation of 1BBB. Since the addition is not executed, it is set as described above in order to balance both sides (so that the operation of 1BBBA in the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than the operation of 1BBBA). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is operating, or the advantageous section counter may be continued even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is operating. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, until 1BBA or 1BBB wins, respectively (inside), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. When 1BB is won, or when it is notified that 1BB has been won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the count by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when 1BB is won, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is until it is notified that 1BB has been won. You may try to decrement one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a conditional device including 1BB is won in a normal section (such as a duplicate winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination E1), and the section shifts to an advantageous section based on the winning of this conditional device. In this case, the waiting section is started from the next game (only when the waiting section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is set.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won, it is in the advantageous section and inside the 1BB, and the addition of the advantageous section is not performed in the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if the condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section and the shift to the standby section has not yet been made to the advantageous section, a long fanning effect (whether or not the 1BB has been won is notified. It is considered that it is not so disadvantageous to the player even if the output (for example, continuous production over a plurality of games) is output. This is because the advantage section counter 69a does not count (decrement) or the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, does not count (decrement) during the standby section because it is not in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won and the inside is inside, the count (decrement) by the advantage section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b described later are performed even after the inside is inside. Count (decrement) is performed. In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable to notify the winning of 1BB at an early stage without performing an unnecessarily long fanning effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games played by the former fanning effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games played by the latter fanning effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 independently and shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won once, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter 69a counts. Do not set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small winning combination B group is won. Then, when the small winning combination B group is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in this game, and the advantageous section is ended.

If the number of times the instruction function is operated when the small winning combination B is won is set in advance as the end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games played when the small winning combination B is won is provided in this counter. You may set "1". Then, when the instruction function is activated once when the small winning combination B group is won, the count value becomes "0", and it may be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

By providing something like an advantageous section flag and setting it to "on" during the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is an advantageous section this time.
However, in the present embodiment, the 8th bit of the segment data of the digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in this game, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is set to "0". Execute the process to change to.

If the small winning combination E1 is won independently and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, either the small winning combination E1 is transferred to the advantageous section with a fixed number of games, or the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won once. A lottery will be held to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how to allocate the probabilities between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is independently won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect of inciting which advantageous section has been shifted is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when the small winning combination B group is won, if the instruction function is activated in the game and then the advantageous section ends with one operation of the instruction function, the advantageous section ends with this game (advantageous). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when the interval is shifted to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B group is won before the predetermined number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, or "1500" is set at the start of the advantageous section), and then the advantageous section is started. Until the end of the section, the count is not interrupted under any circumstances, and the count value is decremented by "1" for each game. Further, for example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. The advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the game this time even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds "0". (Forced) ends (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to "0"), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is updated to "0"). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section ends even if 1BB is in operation.

Further, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is 3) at least once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the small winning combination B is never performed. Even if the instruction function operating game is not executed at the time of winning the group, or even if the small winning combination B group has never been won, the advantageous section is (forced) ended in this game, and the advantageous section display LED77 Turns off.
Further, the image display device 23 may display the number of remaining games, the number of digested games, or the like as an image with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal plate 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, or the like.
The main control board 50 executes each game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number at the time of this game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the "external signal control number" is a number that takes different values depending on the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so that the value corresponds to the external signal control number. Then, after updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal plate 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of a first control command and a second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Further, when the RT parameter is, for example, RT1, it is "00000001 (B)" in the present embodiment. Therefore, the 2-byte data "0010011/00000001"("/" indicates between the first control command and the second control command, which is not actually present), which is a combination of these, is the RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data and the second control command is RWM53, as in the case of the above RT. It is the data stored in.

The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, there is a risk that the correct push order will be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraudulent acts. On the other hand, there is no risk of fraudulent activity as described above for the accessory condition device number. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Further, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is won in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer pressing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the conditional device that is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct push order is won, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM53. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of RWM53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is "A0". Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is "A0" except when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct push order is won, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM 53.

Then, when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80.
Further, the control command transmission means 71 transmits the information of "A0" as the push order instruction number except when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when not in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80. It is conceivable that the control command transmitting means 71 uniformly transmits the push order instruction number of "A0" when it is not in the advantageous section, but in the present embodiment, when it is not in the advantageous section, the push order instruction is given. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls each control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, the push order instruction number, the effect group number, the accessory condition device number, and the like. Based on the command, at what timing (when operating the start switch 41, when operating each stop switch 42, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21). , What kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.), and the specific production contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during 1BB operation or in an advantageous section, the number of acquired cards, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, in the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won in a game in an advantageous section and a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is received, the correct push order "left first stop" or "1- ○" -○ ”etc., which informs the player of the content that the player can easily know the correct answer pressing order. When the push order instruction number of "A0" is received in the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device was actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number "5" is received, it is not possible for the sub-control board 80 side to know whether the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group is won. .. However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect such as displaying a "bell" pattern or turning on a frame lamp in "yellow", which is the corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated. Therefore, immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group is won in the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect can be performed when the winning of the small winning combination 01 is confirmed, that is, after the operation of the first stop switch 42. preferable. Of course, it may be after the operation of the second stop switch 42 or after the operation of the third stop switch 42.

However, if the output timing of the effect when the small role A is won is different from the output timing of the effect when the small role B group or the small role C group is won, the small role A is assigned based on the difference in the timing. Since it is possible to determine whether the player has won the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group, it is possible to count the number of times the small winning combination A has been won, and by extension, it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the pressing order is correct when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group is won, for example, immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group is won, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number "5" is transmitted. .. In this way, the effect group numbers of the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are made the same (“5”), and on the sub control board 80 side that receives the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch. If it is designed so that the effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are different ("5" to "7"). Designed to be more efficient than the previous case (in the latter case, when any of the production group numbers "5" to "7" is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. It is inefficient because it has to be designed to do so).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (on the main side). (Display)), is a time chart showing notification of the correct answer pressing order (notification on the sub side) by the image display device 23. 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the combination lottery means 61 draws the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Further, when the section is in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is in the advantageous section, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

In "Example 1" of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, the push order instruction information is first displayed by the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50. After that, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated when the accessory condition device number is received, and notifies the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number. Both the display of the push order instruction information and the notification of the correct push order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices (first stop), the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated to notify the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. Until then. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called 6 choices, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Of course, even if the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices as in the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so that the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Therefore, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display device 23 ends the notification of the correct answer pressing order. It goes without saying that the effect other than the correct answer pressing order, for example, the image display (character display, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section is continued.

Further, the push order instruction information is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 until the winning determination is made on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct answer pressing order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquired number display LED78 after the push order instruction information is displayed is "00" (the upper and lower digits display "0"), "* 0" (the upper digit is off (*), and the lower digit is "". 0 ”is displayed),“ ** ”(upper and lower digits are turned off),“ −− ”(both upper and lower digits are lit only in segment G), and the like.

In "Example 2" of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, and then the effect group. Send the number and the accessory condition device number. After receiving the effect group number and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order.

Further, in "Example 3" of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 sets the correct push order on the image display device 23. At the moment when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed (or immediately before that), the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In Examples 1 and 2 described above, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at an earlier timing than the notification of the correct answer push order by the sub control board 80. .. On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 is performed at an earlier timing than the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50.

In "Example 4" of FIG. 25, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 and the notification of the correct answer push order by the sub control board 80 are performed at substantially the same timing. .. In the case of such control, for example, the instruction function is activated after "N" ms elapses after the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction). Information display is started), and the sub-control board 80 is controlled to start the notification of the correct answer pressing order after "N" ms has elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Can be mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is preferable that the instruction function is operated (display of push order instruction information) after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. .. Further, it is preferable that the push order notification is performed by the sub control board 80 side after the instruction function is operated by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when an erroneous push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, or when the sub control board 80 notifies a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the push order instruction information is already displayed on the main control board 80, the player may notice an error in the notification by the sub control board 80, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Absent.
Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination, but it may be until the third reel 31 is stopped.

Subsequently, a case where the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct answer push order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and the notification example of the image display device 23. The example of FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to “Example 1” of FIG. 24.

In the instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. In the example of FIG. 26, an example of displaying "1 ○○" is shown.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the correct answer is in the pressing order, the image display device 23 indicates that the pressing order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect, the image display in the correct push order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, the correct answer / incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42. Therefore, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct answer pressing order is terminated. When there are six options, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) continues to be displayed until the winning determination is made (the same applies to the example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the instruction function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23, for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached. .. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, an instruction is given when the first stop switch 42 is operated (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23. This is to prevent the push order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not activated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be terminated at the same time as the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be terminated before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct pressing order.
However, if the push order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all reels 31 are stopped, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small winning combination 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display of the push order instruction information "= 1". It changes to the indicated "09". If one winning combination is won due to a mistake in the pushing order or the like, "01" is displayed, and if the winning combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. From the display of the push order instruction information "= 1" to the display of the number of medals to be paid out "09", "= 1" → "00" (in order to reset the display once, "00" is displayed. ) → "09" may be displayed.

Alternatively, "= 1"->"**" (in order to reset the display once, the upper and lower digits are turned off)->"09" may be displayed.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or cares for the medal and the medal is bet, the displayed content is changed to "00" in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (It may be "**").

In FIG. 1, the management information control means 72 is a means for controlling (storage, calculation, display, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative)
(5) Character ratio (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38, which will be described later).

First, the "advantageous section ratio (stay ratio of the advantageous section)" is the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section) (staying in the advantageous section with respect to the total game section). ). For example, in the game section with the number of games of "10000", when the number of games of the advantageous section is "7000", the ratio of the advantageous section is "70 (%)".
Further, in the present embodiment, one set is defined as "400" number of games. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the number of "6000" games is set as the "total", and each ratio in the number of "6000" games is calculated.

Furthermore, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted for the purpose of at least "175,000" games. Then, when the cumulative total is less than the number of "175000" games, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, a blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, a lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) that can be stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of games is "175000" or more.

The "continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first-class special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in this embodiment, "refers to the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired.
For example, when the number of medals acquired in the number of "6000" games is "2000" and the number of medals acquired when the "Type 1 Special Character (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous combination" The object ratio (6000 games) is "25 (%)".

In addition, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the character is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Here, the "accessory" means, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, the second-class special accessory (CB), 2BB (second-class accessory continuous operation device, CB continuously operates), SB. (Single bonus) is included.
Since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided in the present embodiment, the bonus ratio is the same as the continuous bonus ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a part of the storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the 4-digit numerical value starting with "F" indicates the address of RWM53. A 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer that stores data about advantageous intervals. As information on the advantageous section, it has three storage areas of a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, a total number of games played, and a ratio of the advantageous section. The storage area of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), and the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"). The storage area of is 1 byte (“F008”).

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is "+1" each time one game is digested.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of advantageous section games by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games") is added every time one game is digested. Therefore, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games played, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, it is an object to store at least "175,000" times or more as the total number of games played. This is to display the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio when the total number of games is "175,000" or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

Further, assuming that all of the total number of games "175000 (D)" are advantageous sections, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "175000 x 100" (D), and this value is "25 digits" in binary. Therefore, 3 bytes of "24" digit is not enough, but 4 bytes of "32" digit can be stored.
For the above reasons, the storage area for the total number of games is set to 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is set to 4 bytes.

Regarding the total number of games, "1" is added for each game, but the total number of games is not limited to this, and a numerical value other than "1" (value corresponding to the total number of games) is added. May be good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is "100 (D)" at the maximum value, the value is "7" digits in binary, so that it can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is continuously updated for each game and the number of games, and when the storage area of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF (H)", about 16.78 million in decimal numbers), the total number of games is changed. The count ends at that point, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is added by "+100" for each game during the advantageous section, but even if it is assumed that all the games are in the advantageous section, the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. Can be counted up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is completed, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also completed.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games / total number of games played" (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed, and division is not performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is a value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. Since the main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle the decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes, the above calculation method is adopted. Allows calculation by.
In addition, as the advantageous section ratio, an integer is stored in this embodiment, and the part after the decimal point is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is "1100 (D)" and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" is "F008". "0010010 (B)" is stored.

Further, the advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games. It may be stored in "F008". Then, the numerical value of the decimal number based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the total number of payouts. When a medal is paid out by winning a small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, the ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas (01 sets to 15 sets) composed of 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Then, in each 2-byte data, the number of payouts during 400 games is stored. For example, when 9 cards are won and 9 cards are paid out, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of cards paid out.
Here, in the slot machine according to the rules, the maximum number of cards to be paid out in one game is set to "15" or less, and assuming that 15 cards are paid out in each game, "6000" cards are paid out in 400 games. It becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, from the first game to the 400th game, when a payout is made, the number of payouts is stored in the 01st set (“F012” and “F011”). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set ("F014" and "F013").
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and the values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total number of payouts of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 cards have been paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is 17 digits in binary, it is necessary to store it. It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of payouts for the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the total number of payouts for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored because the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (2 bytes each). In addition, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) of the 01st set is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. I will go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total number of payouts (3 byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained unchanged.

Then, in the 6400th game, when the addition to the 2-byte data of the 01st set is completed, the total number of payouts for the 15 sets is calculated (adding each 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set). Update the total number of payouts for the calculated 15 sets.
Similarly to the above, after the 6401 game, when the game shifts to the 6401 game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02nd set is cleared, and the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Memorize the total number of payouts up to.
In the above method, the total number of payouts for 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total number of payouts for 15 sets is calculated. You may update to that value.

The total number of payouts (cumulative) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative number of payouts. The cumulative number of payouts is calculated in order to calculate each ratio (such as the continuous accessory operation ratio described later) when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the cumulative number of payouts continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have passed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of the three bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game of 175,000 times, the number of medals is 22 digits in binary, so it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the number of payouts related to continuous accessories in RWM53.
As shown in FIG. 29, the 01st set includes a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas composed of "F043 (highest digit)" to "F041 (lowest digit)"). ..

Then, in each of the 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out when the continuous accessory is operated by 100 (referred to as a “value corresponding to the number of payouts”) is stored. For example, when a continuous winning combination is activated, a winning combination of 10 cards is awarded and 10 cards are paid out, the value corresponding to the number of cards to be paid out is "+1000".
It should be noted that the reason why the value multiplied by 100 is stored instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. This is so that it can be calculated.

Further, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated during 400 games. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number when the continuous accessory is operated, the value corresponding to the payout number is stored in the 01st set ("F043" to "F041"). To do. From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set ("F046" to "F044").
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and the values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game in 400 games in a row, the value corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is "600,000 (D)", which is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes. Can be memorized by.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) corresponding to the total number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated for 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a value corresponding to the number of payouts between 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out in each game in 6000 games, the value corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is "90000 (D)", which is 24 digits in binary, so it is 3 bytes. It is memorable.

For example, up to the first 15th set, "F070" to "F06E" store the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated in the number of games less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the value corresponding to the number of payouts between the 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the total number of payouts for 15 sets (6000 games) when the continuous accessory is activated is the total value for 6000 games.
Then, when the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01st set is cleared, and the number of payouts in this buffer when the continuous characters from the 6001 game to the 6400 game are operated. Memorize the corresponding value. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated, which is the total of 15 sets, is maintained unchanged.

Then, in the 6400th game, when the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated for the total of 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated. (Addition), the calculated value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory operation of the total of 15 sets is updated.

Similarly to the above, after the 6401 game, when the game shifts to the 6401 game, the 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02nd set is cleared, and the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Until, the 3 byte data of the 02nd set is updated.
In the above method, the value corresponding to the number of continuous payouts for 15 sets when the accessory is activated is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total of 15 sets is continuous. The value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the continuous payouts when the bonuses are operating, and the cumulative number of payouts is calculated. Is for calculating the continuous accessory operation ratio when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have passed, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit value (4 bytes full).
Assuming that 15 medals are continuously paid out for each game, the game "1500 (D)" is continuously added, so that up to about 2.86 million games can be stored with 4 bytes.

In addition, the continuous bonus operation ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous bonus operation of 6000 games (“F070” to “F06E”) / the total number of payouts of 6000 games (FIG. 28). Among them, it is a buffer for storing the values of "F031" to "F02F").

In addition, the continuous accessory operation ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is the “cumulative value corresponding to the number of continuous accessories paid out (“F074” to “F071”) / cumulative total number of payouts (“F034” in FIG. 28). It is a buffer that stores the values of "to" F032 ").
Since the above ratio stores up to the maximum value "100 (D)" in decimal, it can be stored in 1 byte.
The continuous bonus operating ratio (6000 games) and the continuous bonus operating ratio (cumulative) can be updated every game, but for example, when there is a request to display these ratios, a calculation is performed. , The calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”), and the value may be displayed.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data relating to the number of payouts of the accessory in the RWM 53. As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 30 and 29, a buffer for storing the payout number-corresponding value of the accessory is provided as well as a buffer for storing the payout number-corresponding value of the continuous accessory. The buffer that stores the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the accessory has the same configuration as the buffer that stores the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the continuous accessory.

That is, for every 400 games, the storage area for 15 sets that can store each 3-byte data as the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated, and the value corresponding to the total number of payouts when the bonus is activated for 6000 games (15 sets). It is provided with a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing the value corresponding to the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated. Further, there are two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing the accessory operation ratio, one for 6000 games and the other for cumulative use.
Since the storage method in each of these buffers is the same as when the continuous accessory is operated, the description thereof will be omitted.

Since the continuous accessory corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, if a medal is paid out during the operation of 1BB, it is stored in the value corresponding to the number of continuous accessories paid out when the continuous accessory is operated.
Further, when the medals are paid out during the operation of all the bonuses including the continuous bonus, the bonus is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated as shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous accessory, is provided as the accessory. Therefore, in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 The value stored in the buffer shown in is the same value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modified example of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer composed of 3 bytes for each of the 01st to 15th sets was provided, and the total value of the 15 sets was stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as the ring buffer.

In FIG. 31, the points corresponding to the number of payouts are stored in each of 3 bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from the first game to the 6000th game, which is the same as in FIG. 29.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total number of payouts from the first game to the 6000th game, each 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.

Next, the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in the 16th set 3-byte buffer ("F070" to "F06E").
Then, when it comes to the 6401th game, the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01st set is cleared, and the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6401th game to the 6800th game is converted into the 3-byte data of the 01 set. I will remember.

When calculating the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401th game to the 6800th game, the calculation is made by adding the 3-byte data of each of the 02 sets to 16 sets.
Further, when the 6800th game is reached, the total payout number corresponding value of the 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated by adding 3 byte data of each of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, the 3-byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the value corresponding to the total number of payouts of the 15 sets. Used when doing.

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) when the setting is changed, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. To. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is based on turning on the power switch 11 in the situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of changing the setting described above is executed before the set value can be changed (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the above data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the above data is not initialized and is maintained.
Here, the "unrecoverable error" refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example
1) When the read setting value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (setting value abnormality)
2) When a symbol that should not be displayed (kicking symbol) is displayed as a result of determining the stop symbol (symbol combination error)
3) Random number update error determined for each interrupt process,
4) For example, when the power failure / recovery data is not a normal value.

When an irreversible error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range of RWM53 (data of each buffer of FIGS. 27 to 30, set value information, RT information, winning condition device information) is cleared. Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, the return process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11. For example, a medal jam error, a medal retention error, a medal illegal passage error, an abnormality of the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality of the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality of the payout sensor 37, an abnormality of the medal insertion error, and the like can be mentioned.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error content is displayed and the main process is stopped. However, when the hall clerk executes the error canceling operation (removes the error cause) and operates the reset switch 14, is the error cleared? When it is determined whether or not the error has been cleared, the process is restarted.

Next, the update processing of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games will be described. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is abbreviated as the “value corresponding to the advantageous section”.
FIG. 32 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games using the register. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of a portion surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by the dotted line, and FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by the dotted line. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 of a part. Further, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games without using the register.

FIG. 32 is executed at each game, for example, at the end of the game. Further, in the method using registers, in the chip of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (7 registers) can be used at the time of calculation. In particular, since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games ("F004" to "F001") is 4 bytes and the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is 3 bytes, the total is 7 bytes and can be used. The number of registers and the number of bytes match.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played (data of “F007” in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper 2 bytes (data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower 2 bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the lower 2-byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games have overflowed due to the addition of "1" in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data are "FFFF (H)" before the start of this flowchart, digit overflow occurs due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (flag register (F register) built in the main CPU 55). ) Carry flag is "1"). When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that the digit overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding "1" in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether or not a digit overflow has occurred. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the digit overflow occurs is "0". ".
In this embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as a carry overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the upper 1-byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the "upper limit" means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games of this embodiment is counted by 3 bytes, when the total number of games is 3 bytes, specifically when the value becomes "FFFFFF (H)", no further addition is possible. , Judge that the upper limit has been reached. After adding "1" to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag = "1"). is there. It can also be rephrased as when the A register value becomes "0" (when the zero flag = "1"). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games of the present embodiment is 3 bytes full and the decimal number is about 16.78 million, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when the 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but each game is determined to be "Yes" in step S108, and this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section this time. By providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on / off, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is an advantageous section this time. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data of the digit 2 is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the eighth bit is "1". Is.
If it is determined in step S109 that the advantageous section is in progress, the process proceeds to step S110, and if it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not updated and the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether or not the digit overflow has occurred. In the present embodiment, since "100 (D)" is added in increments of "100 (D)" during the advantageous section, it is "FFDC (H) (65500 (D))" and "100 (D)" that the digit overflow occurs in 2 bytes. ) ”Is added to give“ 0040 (H) (65600 (D)) ”. When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27. As a result, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (RWM53) is updated. Further, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27. As a result, the total number of games (RWM53) is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not reach 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted as about 16.78 million, but even if the total number of games is assumed to be an advantageous section and the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, even if "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games in step S112, correct arithmetic processing can be realized without determining whether or not digit overflow has occurred. At the same time, it becomes possible to realize simplification of arithmetic processing.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is set. The process according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to RWM53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in "F007" to "F005" of the RWM53 remains "FFFFFF (H)", and the RWM53 before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the total number of games played.

Next, in FIG. 32, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

When the process proceeds to step S121 after step S112, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written in "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27. In the next step S122, the value of the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written in "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27.
Next, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games played is updated in a batch for 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
When the process proceeds to step S131 after step S112, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated in a batch for 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated for 3 bytes at a time, as in the case of Specific Example 1.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 35, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. 34. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even when it is determined in step S109 that the player is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131 to update the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not added by "100 (D)", but is based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in steps S103 and S104 in FIG. , In FIG. 27, write in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001". In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples of updating the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games via the register (using).
On the other hand, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games without going through the register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, “1” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005".

In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005", it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1". It should be noted that the determination may be made based on whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" is "0000 (H)". When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, "1" is added to the data of "F007". In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The judgment here is that the addition of "1" in step S203 causes an overflow of digits in "F007", determines whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and the carry flag has become "1". When it is, it is judged that the upper limit has been reached. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the data of "F007" is "0 (H)", and when it is "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. When the process proceeds to step S205, the digit overflow occurs even for the upper 1 byte in the addition of step S203, and the value is "0 (H)". Therefore, by subtracting "1" from this value, step S203 is performed. The data before adding "1", that is, "FF (H)" is restored.
Next, the process proceeds to step S206, and "1" is subtracted for the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section this time. This determination is the same as in step S109 of FIG. Then, when it is determined that the player is not in the advantageous section, it is not necessary to update the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section, so that the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the section is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of "100 (D)" to the RWM53, first, the data of "F002" and "F001" are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" is updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

In the next step S209, it is determined in the calculation of step S208 whether or not an overflow has occurred. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

When it is determined in step S209 that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Next, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored. Therefore, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games ÷ total number of games" is used. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rule can only perform an operation with 2 bytes, and cannot perform division of a numerical value of 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the subtraction shown below.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games = x and the total number of games = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a-y = b (> 0)
by = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
In this way, as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the number of times that "> 0 (greater than" 0 ")" is "3", so the quotient of "x ÷ y" is "3". It can be calculated that there is. Then, in the present embodiment, since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "3" in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio.
First, in step S301, the data of RWM53 is acquired in the register. In the same manner as above, seven A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores the data of "F007" D register: Stores the data of "F006" E register: Stores the data of "F005" B register: Stores the data of "F004" C register: Stores the data of "F003" H register: Stores the data of "F002" L register: Stores the data of "F001"

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, and the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. This process clears (sets to "0") the data stored in "F008" in FIG. 27.
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, and the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games), and the calculation result is obtained. Store in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S304, and it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred. When the carry flag is not set (when the carry flag ≠ "1") as a result of the operation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), it is determined as "No".
When it is determined that the carry flag is set (there is a carry flag), the process proceeds to step S305, and when it is determined that there is no carry flag, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. When it is "0", the subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, so the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the high-order byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (the upper 1 byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. When the carry flag is set, it is determined as "Yes" in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 and the above process (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is added by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section game count corresponding value stored in "F001" to "F007" and the advantageous section ratio calculated from the total number of games are stored in "F008".
As is clear from the above, the advantageous section ratio is added by "1" each time the processes of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 are executed once. That is, the number of executions (number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

In the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and used as the advantageous section ratio (%). By (repeating subtraction), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated. be able to.

Specifically, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated for 6000 games (15 sets) (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28). , "F031" to "F02F"), by repeating the same subtraction as above, the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory of 6000 games is activated / the total number of payouts of 6000 games" is calculated. The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games).

Further, from the cumulative total number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the cumulative total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “ The quotient of "cumulative value corresponding to the total number of payouts during continuous bonus operation ÷ cumulative total number of payouts" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F076" in FIG. 29 as the continuous bonus operation ratio (cumulative).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory of 6000 games is activated (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts of 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). , Calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games / total number of payouts in 6000 games", and store the value in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the accessory operation ratio (6000 games). ..

In addition, from the cumulative total number of payouts when the accessory is activated (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total number of total payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “cumulative total”. The quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts during operation of the accessory / total number of total payouts in total" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F0B6" in FIG. 30 as the accessory operation ratio (cumulative).

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, the “continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, the “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, and the “continuous accessory ratio” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the display example of "ratio (cumulative)", "character ratio (cumulative)". These five pieces of information are displayed according to the information type and the numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
The five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and are not limited to these pieces of information. Information other than these may be displayed, or some of the information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The management information is displayed as described above for the following reasons.
For amusement machines, those that meet the type test stipulated by the Fuei Law are allowed to set up a hall. Here, in the type test, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio when 6000 games are executed do not exceed the predetermined values (70% for the bonus ratio and 60% for the continuous bonus ratio). There are stipulated regulations.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the character ratio and continuous character ratio of the game machine applied for is to be attached (in the future, the average value will also be described for the advantageous section ratio. May be required).

In this case, the hall clerk or a third party can easily confirm whether or not the game machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the conforming game machine (whether or not it is fraudulent). It is desired to.
For example, a game machine whose numerical value deviates from the compatible game machine may be different from the compatible game machine. In this case, request the manufacturer to confirm the game machine. Therefore, fraud and the like can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to easily and surely confirm whether or not the conforming information is matched.

In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on by this), the setting key is inserted, and the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. .. In this state, so-called setting confirmation is in progress. Therefore, the set value display LED 73 displays the current set value. Since the setting is being confirmed differently from the setting being being changed, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, the advantageous section ratio is assumed to be "50 (%)", and "50" is displayed on the digits 7 and 8. Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9).
When displaying the numerical value of the management information, it is expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "45". (%) ”Is displayed.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y7" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "60 (%)". ) ”Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "role ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "52 (%)". it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
Further, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the first display, the advantageous section ratio "U750", is displayed.

Further, while the door switch 15 detects that the front door is open, the management information is continuously displayed (each digit 6 to 9 is continuously lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. At that time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, or the door switch 15 may be displayed. When the opening of the front door is detected, the digits 6 to 9 are not turned on, and when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed.

Further, regardless of whether or not the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is every 1500 interrupts). )), The display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on the set value such as the continuous accessory ratio.
On the other hand, it is highly likely that the front door will be opened while the hall is open (when the player can play).
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector,
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35.
d) An error that occurs when the medals are full in the hopper 35 (the sub storage that is provided next to the hopper 35 and stores the medals that overflow from the hopper 35 is full) (both can be restored as described above). An error that belongs to an error) and the like.

If a person involved in the hall opens the front door when such an error occurs, the player may be able to see the management information and infer the set value. In order to eliminate such a situation, when at least one of the above errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not display the lighting. It is desirable to configure it so that it goes out. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the errors a) to d) described above, and it is possible to configure the management information display LED 74 not to display the lighting even when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned non-recoverable error occurs, the credibility of the displayed management information is doubtful, and after the non-recoverable error is cleared, the data that is the basis of the displayed management information is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display it.

In addition, in order to see the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door opening error will always occur, but it is managed by operating the above various switches. You may display the information.

Further, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6", and "A7" are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by a two-digit alphabet, a symbol, a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Further, in the above example, a numerical example different between the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio is shown, but when only the continuous bonus is provided as in the present embodiment, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio are the same value. It becomes.

Further, in the case of performing the above display, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode and "U7 (advantageous section)". Read the segment data to display "ratio)" and display it on digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110 (B)" and "00100111 (B)".

Further, when displaying the numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes "01101101 (B)" and "00111111 (B)".

Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached "175000", the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. In this way, the display pattern is different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175,000 games".

Specific examples of blinking display include displaying in a pattern of repeating turning off and turning on at intervals of "0.5 seconds", turning off time of "0.5 seconds", and repeating lighting time of "1 second". Displaying in a pattern can be mentioned. Compared with the case where the extinguishing time and the lighting time are set to the same time, if the lighting time is longer than the extinguishing time, the display time of the management information can be lengthened and the lighting of the hall etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under circumstances.
Since the display pattern may be different so that it can be determined whether or not the game has reached the "175000" game, the display of the information type "U7" is not limited to blinking or lighting, for example, "U7"("U7"("" It may be displayed differently from the display (more than 175000” games), for example, “U1” (less than “175000” games). Alternatively, when the game is less than "175000", "U7" may be blinked and displayed, and the numerical value may be lit.

In the same manner as above, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games has not reached "6000" games, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio and the bonus ratio, respectively. The numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "6000", the numerical values of the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio are lit and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. 27 is set in the same manner as above. It is read, it is determined whether or not the game has reached "6000", and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Similarly, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games has not reached "175000", the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio, respectively. The numerical value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "175000", the numerical values of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are lit and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. 27 is read, and the game is set to "175000". It is determined whether or not the value has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio can be discriminated by displaying whether or not the number of games is 6000 or more and whether or not the number of games is 175,000 or more (different display modes, etc.). , Has the following merits.
For example, based on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio management information, when determining whether or not the game is an illegal game machine, the number of games played in the management information is By referring to whether or not the value is for, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game machine is an illegal game machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the game machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) in 175,000 games or more, the judgment as to whether or not it is illegal is different. .. It is quite possible that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio in 175,000 games is a value with respect to a sufficient number of games, it is considered that the values have converged. Therefore, it can be determined that the latter is more likely to be fraudulent.

In this way, even if the values are the same, as the number of games increases, the value converges to the design value. Therefore, if the number of games and the value are combined to determine whether or not the game is an illegal game machine, You can make more accurate judgments.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is displayed, and when the total number of games is reached, the lighting display is displayed. On the contrary, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the total number of games has been reached, the display may be blinking.

Further, in the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 may be used to display the management information. It is possible. With this setting, it is not necessary to separately provide digits 6 to 9, which results in cost reduction.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the storage number display LED 76.
The example of FIG. 39 shows an example of having nine medals as credits. Therefore, at first, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "09".
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is not changed (because the door open error is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78, which will be described later).

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every 2 seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the storage number display LED 76 displays "y6" indicating that the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)". Then, when the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, the arrow is shown so as to shift from the display of "50" to the display of "y6", but even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while the display of "U7" is displayed, the display of "y6" is displayed. Of course, (the same is true for other figures).

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating that the "role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "60" of the "role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "y7" and "60" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "A6" indicating that it is the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)". , When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "A6" or "48" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "A7" indicating that it is the "role ratio (cumulative)". , When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "52" of the "role ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the initial display of the advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the above display, the display switches to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78.
In the example of FIG. 40, an example in which "09" is displayed as the number of acquisitions is shown.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, "dE" indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating that the ratio is advantageous. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every 2 seconds.

After that, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error cannot be resolved simply by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error canceling operation is performed. For example, the error is cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this way, the acquired number "09" before the "dE" is displayed is displayed again on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked and displayed.

<Second Embodiment>
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) are always used. , It is in the lit state.
There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when the information is constantly lit. For example, the management information to be displayed may be updated every 5 seconds. Specifically, "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "y645" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... "A752" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... Can be mentioned. A digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, the front door is not shown. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with the “front door opening / closing shaft” (left side in the drawing) as a support shaft in FIG. 41. Further, although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as that of FIG. 41.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are housed inside the base portion 1.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is attached to the left side surface on the inner surface side of the base unit 1. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 housed therein are attached to the back surface inside the inner surface of the substrate portion 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that the state of the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door is opened. Therefore, it is attached to a relatively easy-to-see position in the substrate portion 1.
Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the method in which medals are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, the clerk in the hall opens the front door every time the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted. Then, a method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 always displays the management information, so that the player can see the management information. .. As a result, it is possible to know the ratio of advantageous sections of the platform currently being played, the ratio of continuous characters, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 constantly displays the management information, but is not easily visible to the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 3 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards of 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as that of FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
FIG. 42A is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening / closing shaft of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the drawing. Therefore, if the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front, even if the front door is opened. , It becomes difficult for the player to see.

Further, in the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B was reversed from that of FIG. 3B. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but is located on the left side in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the distance (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is increased. Assuming that the position of the management information display LED 74 is to the left in FIG. 42, when the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, the caulking portion 16a is as shown in FIG. Is the right end portion of the substrate case 16.
In this way, even when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed to access the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B), the management information display LED 74 is damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. It is possible to prevent the spilling more effectively.

Further, the caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the board case 16 is opened, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the game machine and the board case 16 is provided. You may have it. At this time, when removing the board case 16 from the game machine, it is necessary to destroy the crimped portion of the main body as well. In this case as well, similarly to the crimped portion 16a, the position where the crimped portion of the main body is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the crimped portion of the main body is destroyed. When it is a position (for example, the upper end of the board case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is a second position away from the first position (for example, the lower part and the right with respect to the central part of the main control board 50). It is desirable to provide it in the square or left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to the management information display LED 74. it can.
Although the position of the crimped portion 16a is the right end portion, the position is not limited to this, and for example, it can be designed as the upper end portion. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is a lower portion, a right portion, or a left portion with reference to the central portion of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. It can be prevented from being damaged or damaged.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500, but the number is not limited to this, for example, the number of payouts is 3000, the difference is 2000, and the instruction function operating game (when the small role B group is won). It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as 100 games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions such as 1500 games or 3000 cards, and when any one of them is satisfied, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached.

(2) The advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated display (LED or the like) for displaying whether or not the advantageous section is displayed may be provided. However, if the existing LED can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that looks as if it is a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as it is a lamp that is controlled by the main control board 50.

Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 of the stored number display LEDs 76, but may be composed of the segment DP of the digit 4 of the acquired number display LEDs 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, if the advantageous section display LED is arranged in the vicinity of the menu button 25, the player can be made aware that the advantageous section is in progress at the end of the game. For example, even if the storage number display LED76 (the segment DP of the digit 2 is designated as the advantageous section display LED77) and the acquired number display LED78 (the segment DP of the digit 4 is designated as the advantageous section display LED77) are arranged near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the menu button 25 is turned on before the menu button 25 can be operated, so that the player does not notice the shift to the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the operation (displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)).

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns the power on / off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when the store is closed with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, or when the advantageous section display LED 77 is to be turned off at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting the same set value). Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM53 is initialized, and the display data (data of the advantageous section) of the storage number display LED76 is also initialized. Therefore, in the segment data of the digit 2, the 8th bit is also "0". ".

(4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won. However, not limited to this, it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won in the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game and the number of games of the instruction function operation game are determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed only for the determined number of games. May be good. Then, even if the number of games is completed, if the continuation condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operating game again by lottery or the like. Is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery for falling from the advantageous section to the normal section is based on winning each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). To decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated and the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is operating are stored as values obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100, respectively. However, not limited to this, depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio, it is possible to store the number of games itself and the number of payouts themselves without multiplying by 100. Therefore, it is not always limited to storing a value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games is not limited to the number of games itself, but is not limited to this, and depending on the convenience of calculation, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined value (total number of games). The value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are calculated, the calculation of multiplying the data in the storage area in which the number of games itself and the number of payouts itself is stored by 100 and repeatedly executing the subtraction process described above. It can be calculated by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

(6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory operation ratio, and the accessory operation ratio are calculated for each game or a predetermined number of games regardless of whether or not the management information is displayed, and are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, respectively. You may leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory operation ratio, and the accessory operation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when there is a display request), the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53, and the calculation is performed. The result may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, the management information is displayed in order each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. However, the setting switch 13 is not limited to the setting switch 13, and other switches such as the bet switch 40 may be used, or a switch dedicated to displaying management information may be separately provided.
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are composed of one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by the operation of the setting change / reset switch. The same applies to the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, and the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode does not shift to the management information display mode, and the mode shifts to the management information display mode on condition that no error has occurred.
For example, if a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the mode does not shift to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is pressed first, the first management information "U750" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). Turn off 9). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information "y645" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. When the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as described above is possible.

In this way, there are various variations in which switch is used to display the management information and how the relationship between the operation of the switch displaying the management information and the display pattern (displaying time) is set. However, the present invention is not limited to the one shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the management information display pattern is as follows.
a) Display pattern that constantly displays management information b) Pattern that displays management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) The front door is opened and a predetermined switch Patterns that display management information when you operate d) Open the front door, insert the setting key to turn on the setting key switch 12, and display management information when you operate a predetermined switch. Be done.
However, when the operation to shift to the setting change mode is performed and the setting shift mode is entered, the shift to the management information display mode is not performed and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digits 5 are turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the total number of games is counted to 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity has not been reached.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and the total number of games may be counted again.
The same applies to the total number of payouts.

(9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. Therefore, it is not assumed that the ratio of advantageous sections will exceed "70" (%) in the market. However, it cannot be denied that the ratio of advantageous sections may exceed "70" (%), for example, when a goto act is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" that stores the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. It is possible to make it different from the normal time (display that it is abnormal). For example, among the display of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section ratio, a method of alternately blinking the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" at high speed can be mentioned.

Similarly, regarding the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, when the design value upper limit is set to, for example, "60 (%)", and the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, something is wrong. Examples include a method of outputting a warning and displaying the information type display in the same manner as above.
Alternatively, the external signal transmitting means 70 may be used to transmit information such as the advantageous section ratio to the hall computer 200, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds "70" (%), the information related to the warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be "70" (%) or less with respect to all the game sections, the others can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to less than "1/32".
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated whenever the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won, but the instruction function is not activated only by shifting to the advantageous section, and the instruction is instructed. When the lottery for whether or not to activate the function is won, the instruction function may be activated. Alternatively, when shifting to an advantageous section, whether to make it an advantageous section in which the instruction function is always activated, or whether to make it an advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated only when the lottery for whether to activate the instruction function is won. , May be decided by lottery or the like.

Further, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be made when the predetermined number of games is exhausted at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be determined. , Every game, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for shifting (falling) from an advantageous section to a normal section may be performed, and when this lottery is won, the section may be shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, it is unconditionally controlled so as to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. Then, for example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type "U7" is displayed, the numerical value "50" is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time, and then the predetermined time. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed each time.

(12) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are not always displayed with accurate values because the calculation is performed by rounding down the decimal point. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio correspond to the advantageous section ratio (equivalent), the continuous bonus ratio (equivalent), and the bonus ratio, respectively. ) Also referred to as the value to be.
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio are not limited to the values with the decimal point rounded down, the numbers with the decimal point rounded off, the numbers with the decimal point rounded up, and the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value converted in increments of 10 ”.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that stop at the effective line is the same when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is won. For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle-tier cherry can be stopped (winning the small winning combination 36) at the left or middle first stop, and the middle-tier cherry does not appear at the right first stop. (Small role 38 prize). Therefore, it was not possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 was won regardless of the appearance of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the middle cherry is not made to appear, the stop result may be different instead.
For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry is made to appear when the left or middle first stop is made, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won. Make it impossible.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, when the right first stop is made, the middle-tier cherry is controlled so as not to appear as described above, and instead of not causing the middle-tier cherry to appear, the small winning combination E1 or E2 It is possible to make a stop roll that allows the player to judge which one is won.

Specifically, for example, the following control can be mentioned.
First, the small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 are the small winning combinations 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
Then, the small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the time of the left or middle first stop when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and the small winning combination 38 is stopped at the time of the right first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E1. On the other hand, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.

The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 41 is, for example, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank". As a result, the design of the middle reel 31 is different between when the small winning combination 38 is stopped and when the small winning combination 41 is stopped. When the small winning combination 38 is stopped, the "replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when the small winning combination 41 is stopped, the "replay" always stops on the middle reel 31. Thereby, the winning of the small winning combination 38 (small winning combination E1) or the small winning combination 41 (small winning combination E2) can be determined.

Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination 38 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the small winning combination 41 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small winning combination E2 is won. You may. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 has been won when the middle-stage cherry is not stopped, even when the left or middle first stop is made.

In addition, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
The small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 is the small winning combination 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also the small winning combination 36, the small winning combination 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. The small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the time of the left or middle first stop when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and the small winning combination 38 is changed by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the right first stop when the small winning combination E1 is won. The small winning combination 38 is stopped according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.
Then, when the small winning combination 38 is missed when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. As a result, it may be possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won.

(14) When 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and the advantageous section display LED77 is turned on by the time when the predetermined timing of the next game arrives, the effect (continuous effect, etc.) of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. Is preferable. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that the player knows that he / she has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output the continuous production of whether or not 1BBA (special role) has been won. Further, when 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after a predetermined timing has passed (always shown in the figure). At the timing 2) shown in 23, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the time the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small winning combination E1 has won is reached, so that the small winning combination E1 is independently elected and the advantageous section is entered. Since it can be seen that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect that encourages whether or not the player has won 1BB.

(15) In the present embodiment, when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination B group is won, one winning combination can be won. However, the number of small wins that can be won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning the small win group B is not limited to this. Further, the omission rate at the time of incorrect answer of the push order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is 75% in this embodiment, but is not limited to this, and various settings such as 50% can be set.
Further, even when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination C is won, it is possible to set the winning combination to be missed with a certain probability as in the case where the small winning combination B is won.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is increased with respect to setting 1, and it is advantageous when, for example, the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number. Added the section.
However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of the small winning combination A of the setting 6 is increased and the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is lowered with respect to the setting 1, so that the game with the setting 6 is smaller. It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), it is possible to add an advantageous section.

(17) In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of a single winning of a conditional device that does not include a special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, a small winning combination E1, it is advantageous by a predetermined timing. It was decided to turn on the section display LED 77. Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set in various ways. For example, in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is completed, when the medal is paid out in the game, when the medal payout is finished, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when the replay decides to shift to the advantageous section in the winning game, the automatic bet ends based on the winning of the replay, or the game starts in the next game (replay). When the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

(18) At the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the small winning combination 36 can be won, so that the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle-tier cherry can appear, and when the winning flag of 1BBA is also set, the middle-tier cherry does not appear in any push order (all small winning combination 38 is won). The stop control may be performed as follows.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that the player cannot be fanned by displaying the middle cherry even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is independently won after being inside the 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA + small winning combination E1", so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As mentioned above, it is not possible to decide the transition to the advantageous section inside, so even if the player wins the small role E1 and the middle cherry appears after knowing that the player is inside, the player will not be able to decide. , I get the impression that I wasted money. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, so that the player does not have to give the impression that he / she has made a wasteful pull.

In particular, there are "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" (FIG. 11) as a combination of symbols of the small winning combination 38. It is similar to the symbol 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B". Therefore, by making the combination of the above symbols of the small winning combination 38 appear, it is possible to make it appear to be missed when the small winning combination B group is won (do not show it as a rare role).
The above is the same when "1BBA + small role E2" is won, when the small role E1 is won alone after being inside 1BBB, or when the small role E2 is won alone after being inside 1BBB. Is.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay is the same (the number is "8978") between the non-RT and the RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the transition to RT1 is performed, a lottery for replay E is performed at RT1, and an advantageous section is added by winning the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be set in the additional special zone (a state in which the frequency of addition is high and the number of additional games is large). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, the addition special zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of Replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. May be good.

(21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of migrating to different RTs in this way, they may be migrated to the same RT. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after 1BBB operation is completed. In this case, after the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be added and set as a special zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative total), and bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative total) are displayed as management information, but other than these. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, such as the payout rate.
Examples of the method of calculating the payout rate include the following methods.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" / "Total number of games excluding replays after winning a replay"
b) "(Total number of payouts + number of replay prizes x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games played"
Then, when a) is adopted, each buffer for storing "total number of payouts x 100" and "total number of games excluding replays after winning the replay" is provided. Further, when b) is adopted, a buffer for storing "(total number of payouts + number of replay winnings x 3) x 100" is provided. It should be noted that buffers of "total number of payouts x 100" and "number of replay winnings x 300" may be provided separately, and the values of both may be added.

In addition, "3" of "replay winning number of times x 3" means the number of bets of the game when the replay wins. For example, when the number of bets fluctuates depending on the game state, etc., the bet number is not limited to "3", but the value bet on the game when the replay wins (for example, "2" or "1"). There may be a game to play.
In addition, it has a storage area that stores the total number of games, the total number of payouts, and the number of replay wins (may be "the number of replay wins x the value bet on the game when the replay wins"), and the payout rate can be determined. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Further, as the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the above-mentioned calculation method.
Then, by displaying the payout rate as one of the management information and comparing it with the design payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is illegal. Further, also in this case, if the lighting mode is different depending on whether or not the total number of games is 6000 games or more and whether or not 175,000 games or more, it is more accurately whether or not the game machine is illegal. It becomes possible to judge.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P." and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. The payout rate (three-digit number) can be displayed using.

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter for the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" in the case of an increment counter, various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in RWM53) are stored in order to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. Initialize the value). Examples of the parameters to be initialized include an advantageous section counter 69a, an upper limit counter 69b, and the number of games of the instruction function operating game (when the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won). Then, "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Further, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 for storing the parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", ...

This is simple because it can be initialized by repeating the process of inserting "0" into the address of the RWM53 within the predetermined range while shifting the address by one, similar to the initialization process of the RWM53 accompanying the setting change. This is because it can be executed by the converted processing. The parameters that are cleared with the advantageous section as the upper limit are initialized even when the setting is changed.
The address of the RWM53 that stores the parameters to be initialized is assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", ...), And "0" is assigned to the address. Even when the process of inserting is initialized by repeating the process while shifting the address by a predetermined value (“2” in the above case), the process can be simplified.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and the count value is "0", it means that it is "0" due to the initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) And "0" cannot be determined from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not it is the upper limit of the advantageous section based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and the data indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section (in a predetermined area of RWM53). Must be done based on (remembered).
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the upper limit only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the data of RWM53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processing of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination processing. ..
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is always displayed, so that the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game, for example. ..
Then, it is conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio and the like each time when displaying.
From the above, the same management information (for example, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated multiple times in one game.
(25) The above-described embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

Subsequently, the third and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The "instructed game section" refers to a game section in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section.
The "instructed game section" is similar to the conventional AT (abbreviation of "assist time". When the AT is executed in the RT having a high probability of winning the replay, it is "ART"). In the following description, the "instructed game section" will be referred to as "AT" as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function operating game" means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, when the replay B group of the embodiment is won, when the replay C group is won, and when the small winning combination B group is won. , And when the small winning combination C group is won, it means that the instruction function is always activated.
Since the AT of the present embodiment is executed at RT3 (high probability of replay) in principle, it is "ART" in principle, but it may fall to RT2 due to an operation error of the stop switch of the player. Even if it falls from RT3 to RT2, AT is continued. Furthermore, AT may be executed even at RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, an AT at an RT that does not have a high replay probability such as RT3 is not strictly "ART". Further, when the player has fallen from RT3 to RT2 during AT, the correct answer pressing order is displayed by operating the instruction function in order to return to RT3 by operating the instruction function when the replay B group is won.

On the other hand, "increased execution frequency" means that, for example, when the small winning combination B group is won or the small winning combination C group is won, the instruction function is not activated at "100%", for example, the instruction function is activated at 95%. It is a concept that includes such cases.
As will be described later, during the instruction game period, when the small winning combination B group is won, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function, and when this lottery is won, it is conceivable to activate the instruction function. In such a case, since it does not mean that the instruction function is always activated, it is stipulated that the execution frequency is increased.

As described above, the instruction game section is a game section in which the instruction function operation game is executed, and therefore, as a premise, it is necessary to be an advantageous section. Therefore, the designated game section is always an advantageous section, and the designated game section is a normal section or a waiting section (hereinafter, the normal section and the waiting section may be collectively referred to as a “non-advantageous section”). There is no.
In addition, the start and end of the designated game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the designated game section may be started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is started, the designated game section is not started immediately, but the designated game section is started when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the end condition of the designated game section may be determined at the start of the designated game section, or may not be determined at the start of the designated game section.
When the end condition of the designated game section is determined by the start of the designated game section, the designated game section may be extended after the designated game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) for determining the designated game section can be mentioned. For example, first, the end condition of the designated game section may be set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games in the designated game section may be set to, for example, "50" games or "100" games.

Secondly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of payouts. If it is set in this way, the end condition will be the same as that of the special game. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to, for example, "the number of payouts exceeds 300".

Furthermore, the third is to set the end condition of the designated game section by the difference number of sheets. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to "the difference number exceeds 200".
Fourthly, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of times the instruction function is operated at the time of winning the small combination B group and the small combination C group (may be only the small combination B group). Specifically, in a game in which the end condition of the instruction function section is set to "the number of times the instruction function is operated 50 times when the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are won", and the number of times the instruction function is operated is 50 times. It is mentioned to end the instruction game section.

In the designated game section defined as described above, when the designated game section is extended, the parameters defining the designated game section are changed (also referred to as "extension", "addition", and "addition").
For example, in the designated game section of 100 games, when the designated game section is extended to the 50th game and the number of games is increased by 30 games, the remaining number of games in the designated game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
Similarly to the above, when the designated game section is set by the number of payouts, the difference number, or the number of times the designated function is operated, when the designated game section is extended, the value to be added to these parameters is determined, and the remaining parameters are determined. Add (add) the values.

Further, the indicated game section (AT) may be started and ended based on the transition of the game state.
Here, as the "game state", in addition to the RT (lottery state) described above, a control state controlled by the main control board 50 can be mentioned. That is, the gaming state is a concept including both a lottery state and a control state.
Further, the "control state" is a gaming state that can be determined independently of RT (as will be described later, there may be a control state linked to RT).
Examples of the control state include concepts such as precursor, CZ (abbreviation of "chance zone"), AT, and normal. More specifically, as the control state performed in the advantageous section, a state in which the transition probability to the instruction game section (AT) is high (high probability state), a state in which the transition probability is low (low probability state), or the instruction game section (AT) Examples of the control state include various control states in consideration of game playability, such as a state in which the additional winning probability of the indicated game section (AT) is high (additional special zone, etc.) and a state in which the additional winning probability is low.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section, the control state is changed from "normal" to "precursor". In this precursor, there are a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) to normal. When the transition condition to CZ is satisfied in the omen, the transition to CZ is performed, and when the transition condition to normal is satisfied, the transition to normal is performed.
In addition, when it shifts to CZ, it has a case of shifting to AT (promotion) and a case of shifting to precursory or normal (falling). In CZ, when the transition condition to AT is satisfied, the transition to AT is performed, and when the transition condition to precursor or normal is satisfied, the transition to precursor or normal is performed, respectively.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of transition to AT, when the same RT transition (FIG. 22) as in the first embodiment is performed, control is performed so that the RT3 stays. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed. Further, after the transition to RT3, in order to prevent the player from falling from RT3, the correct answer pressing order for maintaining RT3 by operating the instruction function is displayed at the time of winning the replay C group.

Further, for example, a finite RT may be provided, and the AT may be used while staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT ends when the finite RT shifts to another RT.
The "finite RT" means staying in the RT until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the end condition of the RT is satisfied and the player shifts to another RT.
For example, when shifting to a finite RT after the end of a special game, it is possible to execute AT at this finite RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted by the finite RT, the game shifts to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and the AT, that is, the indicated game section and the advantageous section are ended.
Further, as in the first embodiment, in the case where the special combination is won and the transition to RT4 (internal middle RT) is performed, for example, when the special combination in the finite RT is won, the RT transition may be performed. In this case, the finite RT ends with the winning of the special combination, and after the end of the special game, it can start from a predetermined RT (for example, the non-RT in FIG. 59) different from the finite RT.
On the other hand, in the case of the specification that does not shift to RT when the special role is won, the finite RT is not ended even if the special role is won during the finite RT, and after the special game is finished, it has been executed until then. It can be restarted from the middle of the finite RT.

Further, since the precursor and the CZ are executed in the advantageous section, the instruction function can be activated in the game section. Therefore, it is arbitrary whether or not to activate the instruction function, but since it is during AT that the instruction function is always or frequently activated, the instruction function is not activated as much as during AT during the precursor or CZ. During the omen or CZ, the instruction function may be activated at a small rate, or the instruction function may be activated only once. In addition, in the specification that shifts from normal to precursor with the transition from normal section to advantageous section and may fall to normal (normal section) before shifting from the precursor to CZ or AT, precursor or CZ (advantageous). It is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once during the section).

In particular, when the player shifts to the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated at the time of winning the first small winning combination B group in order to achieve "execute at least one instruction function operating game in the advantageous section" at an early stage. ..
Further, since the AT is premised on being an advantageous section, the AT also ends when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of remaining games of AT is reached and 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached, the advantageous section and AT are terminated.

"Freeze" is to delay the progress of the game by suspending it for a predetermined period of time. For example, acceptance of medals, acceptance of operation of bet switch 40, acceptance of operation of start switch 41 and stop switch 42. This is to put the function related to (accepting the stop operation of the reel 31) into the pause state. In addition to executing such a freeze, it is possible to output various effects during this freeze period.
The freeze is executed, for example, at the end of AT. On the other hand, after the transition to the advantageous section, if only CZ is executed (when AT is not executed), the freeze is not executed. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, there are cases where the freeze is executed and cases where the freeze is not executed at the end of the advantageous section.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be added.
As described above, various AT parameters can be mentioned, but in the third embodiment, the AT end condition is determined by the number of games played.
In the third embodiment, FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10) will be described as the processing on the main control board 50 side.
Further, Examples 1 (FIG. 53) and Example 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
Further, in the following example, AT is started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of AT. That is, "AT = advantageous section".
However, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, it is of course possible to have an advantageous section but a non-AT period (for example, precursor, CZ, pullback period, special game, etc.). (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Further, in Examples 1 to 10 below, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous section counter, and the like are provided (in all the examples, it does not mean that these three counters are always provided).
In the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes. Then, the description of the same step number as the step number already described will be omitted as appropriate.
Further, the count value by the counter is abbreviated as "counter value".
Furthermore, "clearing" the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to "0" in the increment counter).

In the third embodiment, when the condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is won during the AT, the number of games of the AT is added. The number of games to be added may be determined in advance according to the conditional device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the conditional device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when a small winning combination E1 with a number of "250" is won, the number of additional games is determined to be "50" (50%), "100" (40%), or "200" (10%). To do. In addition, when the small winning combination E1 with the number of placements "750" is won, the number of additional games is determined to be "30" (50%), "50" (30%) or "100" (20%). Be done.
Further, regardless of the above example, the number of additional games of the AT may be predetermined based on the control state and the condition device, or the number of additional games of the AT may be drawn based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, for example, even when the same condition device is won, the number of additional games determined or lottered can be different depending on the control state during execution.

In the third embodiment, as described above, "AT = advantageous section", and as in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500 games. Therefore, the maximum number of ATs is 1500.
Here, when starting the AT, the initial value of the number of games played by the AT is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of games played by the AT is added according to the winning condition device.
When adding the number of AT games, the total number of AT games (meaning the sum of the number of digested games of AT and the number of remaining games; the same shall apply hereinafter) is unlimited regardless of whether or not it exceeds "1500". There are cases where the addition is executed and cases where the addition exceeding "1500" is not executed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", the number of AT games to be executed is limited to "1500".

Furthermore, when adding the number of games during AT, the method of executing the addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end, and the closer to the upper limit of 1500 games, the more difficult it is to add (the expected value of the number of additions becomes smaller). ) Method. To give an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of AT games is, for example, "100" and the condition device to be added is first won in a situation where the addition is not performed at all, for example, 80 The addition number "100" is selected with a probability of%, but when the total number of AT games is "1000" or more, when the same condition device as above is won, for example, an addition with a probability of 80%. This is the case when the number "50" is selected.
Even in the case of controlling in this way, there are cases where the addition is continued even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" and cases where the addition is stopped.
Furthermore, when the addition is continued even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", there is a method of storing the value even if the value exceeds "1500", and the amount exceeding "1500". For, there is a method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (Example 1) below is an example in which the addition is executed (added to the counter) without any limitation even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" (regardless of the total number of games).
Further, FIGS. 44 (2) to 46 (4) are examples in which the addition is not executed (not added to the counter) when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500". In this case, the additional lottery itself is not executed, and the additional lottery itself is executed, but after the additional lottery, it is determined whether or not the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", and if it exceeds "1500", There is a case where the additional lottery result is cleared. The latter is adopted in FIGS. 44 (Example 2) to 46 (Example 4).

If it is decided to add it, a freeze may occur. This is to generate a freeze and output an additional effect (number of games to be added, etc.) during that period.
However, if it is decided to add the number of games and the number of games is cleared because the total number of games of AT exceeds "1500" after the freeze is generated, the number of games is added even if the freeze occurs. It happens that it is not done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition device to be added in the game this time and performing an additional lottery, it is decided to add the additional number, and after it is confirmed that the additional number is added to the remaining number of games of the AT. For example, in the next game, there is a control that causes a freeze as well as an additional effect.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 47 (5) to 49 (7), when the total number of AT games reaches "1000" or more (that is, when the upper limit of "1500" is approached), the expected value of the additional number is reduced. This is an example of Here, when the expected value of the number of additions is reduced, the probability of winning the addition is lowered, the number of additions is reduced, and both of these are executed.

Further, in FIGS. 50 (8) to 52 (10), when the total number of AT games reaches "1000" or more (that is, when the upper limit of "1500" is approached), the winning combination (winning condition device) This is an example of lowering the grade of and performing an additional lottery. Here, "lowering the grade of the winning combination" is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, a small winning combination E1 having a placement number of "250" and a small winning combination E1 having a placement number "750" are provided as conditional devices to be added to the lottery. It is assumed that it has been done.
Here, the small winning combination E1 having the number "250" is a conditional device that is difficult to win because the number of small winning combinations E1 is smaller than that of the small winning combination E1 having the number "750". In such a case, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small winning combination E1 of the number "250" is x1, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small winning combination E1 of the number "750" is x2 ( Let x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the number of additions, a method of providing a plurality of types of lottery tables in advance and changing the lottery table used in the addition lottery is adopted.

When the total number of AT games is less than "1000", when the small winning combination E1 with the number "250" is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x1 and the small winning combination E1 with the number "750" is won. At that time, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the total number of AT games is "1000" or more, both when the small winning combination E1 with the number "250" is won and when the small winning combination E1 with the number "750" is won. An additional lottery will be held with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small winning combination E1 with the number "250" is won, the grade is lowered to the small winning combination E1 with the number "750", and the lottery is added.

Alternatively, when the total number of AT games is "1000" or more, when the small winning combination E1 with the number "250" is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2, and the small winning combination E1 with the number "750" is assigned. If you win, you may draw an additional lottery with the expected value x3 (x3 <x2).
The expected values x1 to x3 are assumed to exceed "0", but may be, for example, "0". The additional lottery with the expected value of the additional number "0" includes, for example, setting the additional winning probability to "0", or winning the additional number "0" although the winning itself is done in the additional lottery. ..

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the number of additional numbers when the small winning combination E1 is won is x11, and the expected value of the number of additional numbers when the small winning combination D is won is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total number of AT games is less than "1000", when the small winning combination E1 is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small winning combination D is won, the additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12. ..
Next, when the total number of AT games is "1000" or more and the small winning combination E1 is won, the small winning combination D is replaced with the winning, and an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a lower-grade winning combination in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games of the AT in which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to "1000", but the threshold value is not limited to this, and is not limited to "500", "800", and "1200". , "1300", "1400", etc., can be set in various ways according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing Example 1 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digested games during AT, and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit number of games "1500" in the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, "100" is given as an initial value (number of games) at the start of AT. Therefore, "100" is set in the AT counter at the start of AT. Then, each game is subtracted by "1" (decrement counter).

Further, the upper limit counter is set to the initial value "1500" at the start of AT. Then, each game is subtracted by "1" (decrement counter).
From the above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes "0", the end condition of AT is satisfied.
If 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter will not be updated (counting will be interrupted) until the end of the 1BB game. On the other hand, the upper limit counter is updated every game even during 1BB game. That is, since the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, after the end of 1BB, the AT counter value at the time of winning 1BB is restarted.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the 8th bit in the segment data of the digit 2, "1" is set during the advantageous section, and "0" when it is not an advantageous section. Is set.

In FIG. 43 (a), in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs a command transmission process at the start of the game to the sub control board 80. This process is the process shown in (b) in the figure described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S402, and the control when the start switch 41 is operated is executed. In step S402, it continues to detect whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, the internal lottery process is executed. This process is the same as the lottery of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, "addition" is an addition of the number of AT games. Therefore, when the game is not in AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but not in AT), the additional lottery in step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery in step S404 is the process shown in (c) in the figure.
In this embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won, the AT addition lottery is executed.
In addition, the number of additions and the winning probability thereof shall be determined in the lottery table described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S405, and the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is the process shown in (d) in the figure described later.
In the next step S406, it continues to determine whether or not all reels 31 have stopped, and when it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, a variable update process is performed as a process at the end of the game. This process is the process shown in (e) in the figure. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S401 of FIG. 43 (a), the game start command transmission process of FIG. 43 (b) is executed.
First, in step S411, the AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As for the value of the advantageous section flag, "1" is transmitted when it is in the advantageous section, and "0" is transmitted when it is not in the advantageous section. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. Through the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, and an advantageous section flag value, to the sub control board 80.

Proceeding to step S404 of FIG. 43 (a), the additional lottery of FIG. 43 (c) is executed.
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in the ROM 54 in advance, and determines the number of additional numbers corresponding to the winning combinations and the winning probability thereof. Specifically, for example, when the small winning combination E1 alone is won with the number "250", the probability of determining the additional number to "50" is 60%, and the probability of determining the additional number to "40" is set. It can be set to 40%. In addition, when the small winning combination E1 alone is won, the probability of determining the additional number to "30" is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the additional number to "20" is set to 50%. Can be mentioned. For other conditional devices, the winning probability and the number of additions are determined.

In the next step S422, an additional lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result of the lottery (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, when the AT counter value up to that point is "50" (the number of remaining games) and the number of additions is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Proceeding to step S405 of FIG. 43 (a), the command transmission at the time of operating the start switch of FIG. 43 (d) is executed.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. Therefore, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411 at the start of the game, but the AT counter value is transmitted again in step S431. When it is not decided to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is decided to add the number of AT games, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. When the sub-control board 80 receives the AT counter value in step S411 and then receives the AT counter value again in step S431, the sub-control board 80 receives the AT counter value stored in the sub-control board 80 side in step S431. Rewrite to the AT counter value.
Before step S431, it is determined whether or not the AT addition has been executed in the game, and only when the AT addition is executed, the second AT counter value in the game is transmitted in step S431. May be good.

Proceeding to step S407 of FIG. 43 (a), the variable update process of FIG. 43 (e) is executed.
First, in step S441, the AT counter value is subtracted by "1". Next, the process proceeds to step S442, and the upper limit counter value is subtracted by "1". In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. When it is determined to be "0" (that is, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit "1500"), the process proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps in order to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is "0" and the number of times the instruction function operating game is executed is "1" or more. Here, when the AT counter value is "0", it means that the number of remaining games of AT is "0".
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is "1" or more, for example, an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
The instruction function operation counter can be, for example, an increment counter that adds "1" each time the instruction function is activated. If this counter value is "1" or more, the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is It can be determined that it is "1" or more.

In addition, the instruction function activation flag is turned off when the instruction function activation game has never been executed after executing the advantageous section and AT, and is turned on (after that) when the first instruction function activation game is executed. Is a flag. When this instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more.

As described in the first embodiment, when the section shifts to the advantageous section, the winning combination of the instruction function operating game (the game having the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the number of payouts is the largest) is won at least once. Game of time. In the first embodiment, the game at the time of winning the small winning combination B. The same shall apply hereinafter), the advantageous section cannot be ended. In this way, executing the instruction function operating game at least once during the advantageous section has priority over the end condition of the AT.

However, when the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached without executing the instruction function operating game even once, the advantageous section can be ended (see the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) described later). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is "0", and if it is "0", the advantageous section and AT are not performed without determining step S444. I am trying to finish.

In step S444, when it is determined that "the AT counter value is" 0 "and the number of times the instruction function operating game is executed is" 1 "or more", the advantageous section and the end condition of AT are satisfied. move on. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S444, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section).

In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S446, and the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Further, the process proceeds to step S447, and the value of the advantageous section flag is cleared (set to "0"). In this way, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all the parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the control process on the main control board 50 side. In Example 2 of FIG. 44, an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an additional counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) are provided as counters. .. Further, as in Example 1, an advantageous section flag is provided.
The addition counter adds the number of additions each time the number of games is added during AT.

In FIG. 44, (a) and (b) are the same as in Example 1 of FIG. 43.
Further, in the additional lottery process of FIG. 44 (c), after the additional lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451 to determine whether or not the additional counter value exceeds the specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1400". That is, when "100" is set as the initial value of the number of AT games and the number of additional games of AT reaches "1400", the total number of games of AT becomes "1500", which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. To reach. Therefore, it is set not to add more than the number of games "1400".

When it is determined in step S451 of FIG. 44 (c) that the addition counter value exceeds the specified number (“1400”), even if the addition number is determined in the lottery in step S422, the addition number is added. Instead, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, in step S451, when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The process of the next step S423 is the same as that of Example 1 described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before the addition lottery = "50", the addition counter value = "200", and the determined number of additions is "30", the AT counter value after the addition is "80", and the addition is added. The counter value is "230".

Further, in the command transmission process when the start switch is operated in FIG. 6D, the additional counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in step S461. In Example 1, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but in Example 2, the additional counter value is transmitted. When the addition counter value reaches "1400", the sub-control board 80 can determine that the addition has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, steps S441 to S447 are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1). Further, after step S447, the process proceeds to step S471 to clear the additional counter value. This is to clear all the parameters related to the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 3 of FIG. 45, as counters, an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and increments by “1” each time one game is digested) and an additional counter (initial value “100”” , Increment counter), upper limit counter (same as Example 1). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1500", which is the maximum number of games in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Further, in FIG. 3C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processes as in Example 1. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds the specified number (“1500”). The fact that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number "1500" means that in Example 3, the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500". Therefore, when the addition counter value exceeds the specified number "1500", even if the addition number is determined in step S422, the addition number is not added and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the addition counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined addition number is added to the addition counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of the number of additions to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games played during AT.

Further, FIG. 4D is the same process as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Furthermore, in the figure (e), in step S481, "1" is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In the next steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games exceeds the number of additional games, it is determined that the end condition of the AT and the advantageous section is satisfied.

In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. Then, when the number of AT games reaches "100" without adding the number of AT games even once, the AT counter value becomes "100", the additional counter value becomes "100", and the "AT counter value". ≧ Additional counter value ”will be satisfied. If "Yes" is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No", the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are not satisfied, so the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operating game is "1" or more. When it is "1" or more, the advantageous section and the end condition of AT are satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "1" or more, the process according to this flowchart is terminated in order to continue the AT and the advantageous section in the next game.
The processing after step S445 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing Example 4 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counters are an addition counter (an increment counter set to the initial value "100") and an advantageous section counter (set to the initial value "0", and every game during AT and the advantageous section. It is provided with an increment counter) that is incremented by "1".
In Example 4, the AT counter is not provided. The number of AT games is counted by the advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. The specified number is "1500" as in Example 3.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c) and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
Further, in FIG. 3B, when step S401 is started, the advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, and the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in the same manner as in Example 1.

Furthermore, in the figure (e), in step S501, "1" is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is "1500" or more. When it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is "1500" or more, it means that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, so that the process proceeds to step S504 in order to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not "1500" or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. Similar to step S482 of FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the advantageous section counter value becomes equal to or more than the additional counter value, it means that there is no remaining number of games of AT. If "Yes" is determined in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483, and if "No" is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (the next game also continues the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is the same process as in FIG. 45 (Example 3). If "Yes" is determined in step S483, the process proceeds to step S504, and if "No" is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Proceeding to step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S447 and S471 are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Example 5 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 5 of FIG. 47, the counters are an AT counter (a decrement counter set to an initial value “100” and subtracted by “1” during AT) and an addition counter (set to an initial value “0” and added. It is provided with an increment counter that adds an additional number for each game) and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value of "1500" and is decremented by "1" for each game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000".

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Further, in the figure (c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided when the additional number is drawn. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high accuracy, high accuracy, normal, low accuracy, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
Not limited to this, the lottery table A may have the expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Further, by combining both, the lottery table A has a high probability of additional winning and the expected value of the number of additional winnings is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low probability of winning additional winnings and the expected value of the number of additional winnings is set. It may be set to small.

In FIG. 3C, first, in step S511, the lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number (“1000”). If it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and if it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this process, when the number of additions is less than "1000", the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the number of additions is "1000" or more, the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the ease of addition is changed with the addition number "1000" as a threshold value.
The processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example) 2. Further, FIGS. (D) and (e) are the same processes as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing Example 6 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counters are an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and adds “1” at a time during AT) and an addition counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “100” and is added. It is provided with an increment counter that adds an additional number for each game) and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value of "1500" and is decremented by "1" for each game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).

Comparing Example 6 of FIG. 48 with Example 5 of FIG. 47, they differ in the following points.
Since the AT counter is an increment counter having an initial value of “0” as in FIG. 45 (Example 3), the additional number is not added to the AT counter when the additional lottery is performed.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
Further, in FIG. 48 (c), after the addition lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, the addition number is added to the addition counter value, and the process according to this flowchart ends (step S423 in FIG. 47 (Example 5)). No processing is performed).
Further, FIG. 4D is the same process as in FIG. 47 (Example 5). Furthermore, FIG. 5E is the same process as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing Example 7 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter and is set to an additional counter (initial value “100”, and an increment that adds an additional number each time it is added, as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). A counter) and an upper limit counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value of "0" and is incremented by "1" for each game during an advantageous section) are provided. Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also serves as an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of AT games).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). Further, FIG. 4C is the same process as in FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Furthermore, in the figure (e), in step S521, "1" is added to the upper limit counter value. Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is "1500" or more. When it is determined that the upper limit counter value is "1500" or more, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and AT.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds "1" for each game during the advantageous section, while the addition counter is a counter that adds the number of additions with the initial value "100". Therefore, the "upper limit counter value" When “≧ additional counter value”, it means that there is no remaining number of games of AT. When it is determined as "Yes" in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483, and when it is determined as "No", the process according to this flowchart is terminated in order to continue the AT in the next game.

In step S483, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operating game has been executed one or more times, and if it is executed, the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S483, the process according to this flowchart is terminated in order to continue the AT in the next game.
The processing of steps S446, S447, and S471 is the same as that of FIG. 47 (Example 3). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example 8 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as in FIG. 44 (Example 2). Further, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery in step S403, the process proceeds to step S531 and the condition device group set process is performed. The other processes in (a) are the same as those in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Further, FIG. 4B is the same process as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

FIG. 3C is a flowchart showing the condition device group set process in step S531.
First, in step S541, "0" is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the "conditional device group number" is a number assigned to each of the plurality of conditional devices drawn in the internal lottery by dividing the conditional devices to be added to the lottery into a plurality of groups.

In this example, two condition device group numbers, "0" and "1", are illustrated. Then, a lottery table for additional lottery is provided for each condition device group number.
Further, the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number "0" is referred to as the lottery table A, and the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number "1" is referred to as the lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the number of additions is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the additional number when the small winning combination E1 is won alone is set to "x1", and the expected value of the additional number when the small winning combination D is won is set to "x2". It is assumed that it has been done. Then, it is assumed that "x1>x2" (the expected value of the number of additions is higher when the small winning combination E1 is won than when the small winning combination D is won).
In this case, the conditional device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is "1", and the conditional device group number corresponding to the small winning combination E1 is "0".

Therefore, when the small winning combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is "1". On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is "0".
Then, the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is "x1", and the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is "x2". ..

The description returns to FIG. 50 (c).
When the condition device group number “0” is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number (“1000”). When it is determined that the number is not more than the specified number, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543 and the condition device group number “1” is set. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally "1", so it remains "1". On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the conditional device group number "0" is set in principle, but when the additional counter value is "1000" or more, the conditional device group number "1" is re-set. Set.

In the additional lottery shown in FIG. 3D, first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value "x1") is set when the condition device group number is "0", and the lottery table B (expected value "x2") is set when the condition device group number is "1". To. Subsequent processes after step S422 are the same as those in FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Further, in Example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (Example 2), respectively.

In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, "0" and "1", are mentioned, but three or more types may be provided. For example, the expected value of the number of additions is "x1> x2> x3", and if the addition counter value is less than "1000", the lottery table with the expected value "x1" is used, and the addition counter value is "1000" or more and less than "1200". Then, a lottery table with an expected value of "x2" is used, and when the additional counter value is "1200" or more, a lottery table with an expected value of "x3" is used.

As described above, in FIG. 50 (Example 8), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small winning combination E1, but when the additional counter value is "1000" or more. Will be added to the lottery so as to correspond to the expected value of the small winning combination D. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value "1500" of the advantageous section, the grade of the winning combination is lowered and the additional lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 9 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counter includes an AT counter, an additional counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 45 (Example 3). Further, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 45 (Example 3), respectively. It is a process.
Further, in FIG. 51, the process of (c) is the same as the process of (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 51, the process of (d) differs from (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8) in that it does not have step S423. Others are the same processing as in (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 10 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter includes an additional counter and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 49 (Example 7) (there is no AT counter). Further, the specified number is also set to "1000" as in FIG. 49 (Example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 49 (Example 7), respectively. It is a process.
Further, in FIG. 52, the process of (c) is the same as the process of (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 52, the process of (d) is the same process as that of FIG. 51 (Example 9).

Although FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10) have been described above, basically, an AT counter that counts the number of AT games, an additional counter that counts the additional number of AT games, and an advantage. An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) for counting the upper limit "1500" of the section is provided.
Also, these counters may be increments or decrements.
Furthermore, the AT counter does not have to be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (Example 4) and FIG. 49 (Example 7). In this case, the number of AT games is substantially counted by another counter.
Further, in Examples 1 to 10 described above, an additional lottery is performed according to the winning condition device. Here, when the conditional device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

Further, when performing the additional lottery, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), the additional number may be determined regardless of the additional number up to now.
On the other hand, when performing the additional lottery, as shown in FIG. 47 (Example 5) and FIG. 50 (Example 8), the additional number may be determined in consideration of the additional number up to the present.
"Considering the number of additions" means that the larger the number of additions, the smaller the number of additions (the expected value of the number of additions becomes smaller) in the subsequent addition lottery. As a result, the rate of increase in the number of additional numbers as the game progresses can be moderated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), it is possible to execute the addition indefinitely. If the addition is executed indefinitely, for example, the number of remaining AT games may be "2000", "3000", or the like. However, even if such a number of games is reached, the upper limit number of games "1500" in the advantageous section is prioritized (step S443 in FIG. 43 (e)), so that the AT ends at that point.

However, when the number of AT games is added indefinitely as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), if the number of added AT games is notified to the player as it is, the number of games added exceeds the upper limit of the number of games "1500" in the advantageous section. The number may be notified. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the game can be played in excess of the maximum number of games "1500".
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as shown below with respect to the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additions in response to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section and AT on the sub control board 80 side, and Example 1 of the control process relating to the addition.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, taking FIG. 43 (Example 1) as an example, the process of receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 of FIG. 43 (b) and step S431 of FIG. 43 (d) is executed.
In the above Examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted, but in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

In FIG. 53A, in step S601, a process of receiving the AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, a process of receiving the additional number ((b) in the figure) is executed. In the next step S603, the reception process of the advantageous section flag is executed. Similar to step S601, this process is a process of receiving the value of the advantageous section flag (“0” or “1”) and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. Further, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the figure) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

Proceeding to step S602, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S611, the received addition number is added to the addition counter. The additional counter is provided on the sub control board 80 side. Next, the process proceeds to step S612, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds the specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1500". Therefore, in this example, as in FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the additional counter value exceeds "1500", it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. If it is determined in step S612 that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number (“1500”), the process proceeds to step S613, and if it is determined that the number is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, "1" is set in the additional effect suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the "additional effect suppression flag" is used so that the additional effect is not output when the number of additional effects is already "1500", and the additional effect can be output when the number of additional effects is "1500" or less. , A flag for making that judgment.
In step S614, the number of additions in the game is stored (in the RWM83 of the sub-control board 80). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S604, the process (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This determination is made by determining whether or not the additional number saved in step S614 is "0". Then, when it is determined that the additional number is present, the process proceeds to step S622, and when it is determined that the additional number is not present, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the additional effect suppression flag is "1". If it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S623, and if it is determined that the value is not "1", the process proceeds to step S624.

In step S623, an effect without an additional effect is selected. That is, even if the number of additions has reached the specified number (“1500”) and the additional lottery is won in the game, it is not possible to add more than the current number, so control is performed so that the additional effect is not output. The effect selected here is a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, when the replay is won, an effect suggesting the replay is won (blue or the like)) is output. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, it is possible to select an effect with an additional effect. For example, there is an effect of notifying all or part of the additional number in the game. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to select an effect with an additional effect in the game in which the number of additional effects is determined. For example, a transition to a continuous effect is performed, and then an effect with an additional effect is selected for digesting several games. May be good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that the game does not have an additional number and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As a normal effect, as described above, it is possible to output an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section and AT on the sub control board 80 side, and Example 2 of the control process relating to the addition.
In Example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving the ball ejection suppression flag is executed. Here, the ball ejection suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, and when it is "1", it means that the addition effect is suppressed, and " When it is "0", it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the ball ejection suppression flag "1" is transmitted from the main control board 50, it is an instruction to suppress the addition effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in (b), the additional effect suppression flag is set on the sub-control board 80 side. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the main control board 60 determines whether or not to suppress the additional effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub control board 80 as a ball ejection suppression flag.

Examples of the method in which the main control board 50 transmits the ball ejection suppression flag include the following methods.
Taking FIG. 44 (Example 2) as an example, in FIG. 44 (c), when it is determined as “Yes” in step S451, the ball ejection suppression flag provided on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44 (d), after step S461, the ball ejection suppression flag is transmitted.

In Example 2 of FIG. 54, the same as in Example 1 of FIG. 53 except for step S631 and step S632.
In step S631, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S641, when the ball ejection suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not the value is "1". If it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S642, and if it is determined that the value is not "1", the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, "1" is set in the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM83 of the sub-control board 80, and the process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S643, "0" is set in the additional effect suppression flag, and the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Therefore, when the received ball ejection suppression flag is "1", the additional effect suppression flag on the sub control board 80 side is set to "1", and when the received ball ejection suppression flag is "0", the additional effect suppression flag is set. Is set to "0". Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54 (c), as shown in FIG. 53 (Example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the addition counter value exceeds the specified number. Therefore, the addition number is added to the addition counter in step S611, and the next step. The additional number is saved in S614.
Further, the effect group number reception process in FIG. 53 (d) is the same process as in FIG. 53 (Example 1).

When the sub-control board 80 outputs the additional effect, for example, when the additional number determined in the game is "200", all the additional numbers ("200") may be notified in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to notify in small steps (notify by dividing the number of additions) in a plurality of games (for example, continuous production) including the game. Specifically, when the additional number is "200" in the game, the additional number "100" is notified in the game, "50" is notified in the next game, and "50" is further notified in the next game. For example, to notify.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an image display example of the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 with respect to the addition during AT, and is a diagram showing Examples 1 to 4.
First, in Example 1, the image display device 23 before the addition has "digestion G (meaning" AT digestion game count ") 1200" and "remaining G (meaning" AT remaining game count ") 300". Is shown as an example. Therefore, since "the number of AT digested games + the number of remaining games = 1500", the number of AT games that can be performed has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (for example, it means a case such as step S423 in FIG. 43C), the display of the number of additions is changed and the effect related to the addition is performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains the same as the display before the addition.

Of course, "500" may be added to the counters (AT counters, addition counters, etc.) on the sub-control board 80 side when 500 games are added. As for the number of AT games and the number of additions, real values may be managed by a counter, and only display may be performed as in Example 1. When controlling in this way, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub-control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
If the image display is controlled as in Example 1, it is possible to suppress an effect related to unnecessary addition.

In Example 2, when the number of digested games of AT is 1200 games and the number of remaining games is 200 games, and 500 games are added internally, the correct value (the number of remaining games after the addition) is obtained. ) Is not displayed and the display is switched to another display. In Example 2, the number of remaining games may be displayed as "celebration" or "congratulations". In addition, it may be displayed as "?".

In Example 2, when the total number of digested games and the number of remaining games of the AT is "1500" or less, the number of remaining games is displayed. If it exceeds "1500", the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. The player can grasp that the addition has been performed because the display of the number of remaining games of the AT is changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than the numerical value. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the remaining number of games of the AT, the player cannot grasp the remaining number of games of the AT.

In the case where the number of digested games of AT is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200" before the addition, when "500" is added, the number of remaining games of AT may be set to "700" on the counter. , Or it may be "300".
In addition, when the display of the remaining number of games of AT is "celebration" or "congratulations", if it is a specification that it is confirmed that AT will continue up to the upper limit of 1500 times, "1500-AT digestion game" By calculating the "number of times" by the player, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining games of the AT.
Furthermore, the display of "celebration" or "congratulations" informs the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500", and also serves to indicate that no further additions will be made. It becomes.

Example 3 shows an example in which "500" is added when the number of digested games of AT is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200", as in Example 2. Then, in Example 3, the number of remaining AT games (not shown in FIG. 55) is "+100", which is "300". That is, with this addition, the total number of AT games has reached "1500".

In Example 3, when the total number of AT games is "1500" or more, the display of both the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of the AT is stopped and replaced with the ending effect (movie). The ending effect is such that at least a plurality of games (for example, dozens of games) are continued, and is executed until the number of digested games of the AT reaches "1500". If the final image of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of digestion games of the AT reaches "1500", the final image is continuously displayed, or the image is returned to the beginning of the ending effect and the image is repeated. The method can be mentioned.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of notifying the player that the number of games is not added any more.

In Example 4, as shown in Example 2, when only the number of digested games of AT is displayed and the number of remaining games is displayed as "celebration" or the like, as described above, the player is the remaining AT. Although the number of games cannot be grasped, for example, when the number of remaining games of the AT reaches "10", game information indicating that the AT will not be executed in excess of 1500 games, such as "It will end in 10 more games", is provided. It is to be displayed. The "remaining 10 games" shown in Example 4 is an example, and it is arbitrary as to how many games are left to start displaying the game information. By displaying the game information indicating that the number of AT games is not executed exceeding "1500", the player can know the remaining number of AT games.
In addition, Example 4 can also be used in combination with Example 1 to Example 3.

In addition, when an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional effect itself may be displayed as "Congratulations", "Congratulations", or the like.
Furthermore, when an addition exceeding 1500 games occurs, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an addition exceeding 1500 games occurs may be displayed.
Further, "occurrence of addition exceeding 1500 games" may be set as a mission in the Mythro game. For example, when "the occurrence of an additional game exceeding 1500 games" is generated a predetermined number of times, the mission is completed and some privilege is given to the player.

In this way, even if an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game cannot be executed, but instead, a privilege (profit) for preventing a decrease in the motivation of the player is set. It is preferable to keep it.
In particular, when an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, it is assumed that the rare role is won, but when the rare role is won, no effect is output because the total number of games is "1500" or more. It is unnatural not to do it.
The "mythro game" is, for example, as described in paragraph number "0680" of "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-104442".

FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating how the effect and the like change as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
Since "AT = advantageous section" is set in the third embodiment, the number of acquired sheets continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). Then, in the example of FIG. 56, in order to simplify the graph, the AT continues from the number of games of "0G" to "1500G", and the number of acquired cards continues to increase.
In FIG. 56, FIG. 56A is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and the effect.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis represents the number of AT games and the vertical axis represents the number of acquired games. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of digestion games in the AT (advantageous section) reaches "1200", as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section, even if it has the remaining number of games at that time.
Further, the additional effect is performed up to 1200 games, but when the additional effect of 500 games is won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. In addition, even if a person wins a further addition after that, the additional production will not be performed.

On the other hand, the production related to AT during AT continues until the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Further, the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT are displayed up to 1200 games, but when the additional 500 games are won in the 1200th game, the number of remaining AT games is displayed as shown in Example 2 of FIG. Or stop displaying both the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT as in Example 3 of FIG. 55, and other displays (“celebration” shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55 and Example 3 Switch to the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example (shown by a solid line in the figure) of (1) gradually lowering the additional lottery probability as the number of AT games is exhausted when the AT continues to play "1500", and (2). It is a figure which shows the example (indicated by a dotted line in the figure) which gradually reduces the instruction frequency.
In the above (1), for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, and when the number of AT games is "1000" or more, the lottery table B is used. Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, an additional lottery is performed with a grade corresponding to the winning combination, but the number of AT games is "1000" or more. This corresponds to an example in which the grade of the winning combination is lowered and an additional lottery is performed.

Further, in the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than "500" games, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of AT games is more than "500" games and less than "1000" games, the additional lottery probability is set to the normal probability. When the game is "1000" or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability. Even if the probability of adding AT is gradually reduced as the number of games is exhausted, the rate of increase in the number of acquired cards with respect to the number of games does not change as long as the remaining number of games of AT is available. , The same as in FIG. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example of (2), the instruction frequency is controlled to be gradually lowered according to the digestion of the number of AT games.
Here, the "instruction frequency" is how often the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group (pushing order bell) is won during AT (correct answer pressing order). Whether to display) is specified. For example, when the number of AT games is less than "500" games, the instruction frequency is set to 100% (instruction frequency "high"), and when the number of AT games is more than "500" games and less than "1000" games, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction). The frequency is set to "medium"), and when the game is "1000" or more, the instruction frequency is set to 80% (instruction frequency "low").

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (90% probability of winning) is performed on the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group (pushing order bell) to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. When the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated.
In addition, when the instruction frequency is less than 100% and the replay duplicate winning for promotion or maintenance of RT is obtained, the correct answer pressing order may always be instructed, or the same as when the pressing order bell is won. The frequency may determine whether or not to instruct.

If the instruction function does not work when the replay duplicate is won, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), the replay 03 is displayed when the replay C group is won during RT3, and the player falls to RT2.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in an example such as the first embodiment, if the instruction function does not operate when the push order bell is won, the RT may fall to a disadvantage.
If the instruction frequency is gradually reduced as the number of AT games is exhausted, the number of cases where the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won will gradually increase. Therefore, it becomes difficult to increase. (2) of FIG. 56 (b) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, "AT = advantageous section" was set.
On the other hand, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, a case where the section is advantageous but is a non-AT period (precursor, CZ, pullback period, special game, etc. The same shall apply hereinafter). Of course, to have.
For example, it is a case where the advantageous section is started, the above-mentioned non-AT period is executed for "n" games, and then AT is started.
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already digested the "n" game.
In this case, when the number of digested games and the like is displayed as an image as shown in FIG. 55, the number of digested games in the advantageous section including a part or all of the "n" game is displayed (Example 1), and " n ”The digestion of the game is reflected in the internal counter (upper limit counter or the like shown in FIG. 43 or the like), but the image is not displayed (Example 2).
In the case of Example 1, the specification is such that the number of digested games in a part or all of the advantageous sections other than the AT is displayed to the player, and in the case of Example 2, only the number of digested games of AT is displayed to the player. Become.
Further, in the case of Example 1, both a) the number of digested games in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of digested games in the AT is not displayed) and b) the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of digested games in the AT are displayed. There are cases where it is displayed.

Further, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B, when the number of games is less than "500", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of games is "500" or more and less than "1000", the additional lottery is performed. The probability was set as the normal probability, and when the number of games was "1000" or more, the additional lottery probability was set as the low probability.
Here, it is assumed that AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after shifting to the advantageous section in the same manner as described above.
In addition, when the instruction function operating game is hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. 56 is a graph in which the number of acquired cards decreases as the number of games is consumed (lower right). Become. Then, when the AT is started from 600 games, the graph (upper right) shows that the number of acquired cards starts to increase after 600 games.

In the above example, since 600 games have already been consumed in the advantageous section at the start of AT, the maximum number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the start of AT is 900 games. Therefore, when this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, when the number of AT digestion games is less than "300", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of AT digestion games is "300" or more and less than "600", the additional lottery is performed. The probability is set as the normal probability, and when the number of AT digestion games is "600" or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, similarly to the above, when the AT is started after the non-AT period of 600 games after shifting to the advantageous section, for example, in the “(c) additional lottery” of FIG. 47, the additional counter is set to the specified number “600”. When the number is equal to or greater than that (“Yes” in step S451), the lottery table B may be set.
Here, the specified number is set to "600" when the maximum number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the start of AT is "900" as described above, and the number of games is "2/3" at the time of digestion. Is set as the threshold value.
In this way, when the advantageous section is not necessarily AT, for example, when AT is not started at the start of the advantageous section and AT is started after a predetermined number of games, the expected additional value (additional lottery probability, etc.) is added to the AT game. When changing based on the number of times played, it is necessary to take into account the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Subsequently, the fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmitting means 70, and an external signal (sometimes referred to as an “outer end”) with respect to the external centralized terminal plate 100. To send. The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized in what kind of external signal is output and what kind of timing is turned on / off.
Further, the BB in the fourth embodiment is the 1BBA, 1BBB, etc. of the 1st embodiment, and the BB game is the 1BBA game, the 1BBB game, and the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing Example 1 (upper row) and Example 2 (lower row) of the time chart of the external signal in the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing Example 3 of a time chart of an external signal.
In the examples of FIGS. 57 and 58, as external signals, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB is operating (during the BB game) and an external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are output. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that is turned on when either AT or special game is satisfied). Is.

In the third embodiment, the AT is started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended at the same time as the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, even if the advantageous section is started, the AT is not always started immediately. For example, when the AT start condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, the point that the advantageous section ends when the AT ends is the same as in the third embodiment.

In Example 1 of FIG. 57, AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after starting the advantageous section. When AT is started, the external signal 2 which means the AT signal is turned on. Then, it is assumed that the BB is won during the AT and the BB game is started. With the start of the BB game, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. The AT is interrupted based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is restarted after the end of the BB game. However, the external signal 2 remains on even during the BB game.
When the BB game is completed, the external signal 1 is turned off. After that, when the AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of the AT, the advantageous section also ends (the advantageous section display LED 77 goes out). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are completed before reaching the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
When the 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended even if the remaining number of games of the AT is reached at that time.

In Example 2 of FIG. 57, the point that AT is started after the lapse of a predetermined number of games after starting the advantageous section is the same as that of Example 1. Further, the point of shifting to the BB game during AT is also the same as in Example 1. Then, Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. Therefore, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the BB game has not been completed yet. Then, after the lapse of the end condition of the advantageous section, the BB game is completed.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the BB game is in progress are on until the end of the BB game. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. Of course, the advantageous section ends when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off. Further, since the AT is executed within the advantageous section, the AT also ends with the end of the advantageous section.
As described above, in Example 2, the AT ends when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has passed. This makes it possible to prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

As an example of satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section during the BB game as in Example 2, for example, first, the number of AT games is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the number of games is set during the BB game. However, there are cases where it is subtracted. Secondly, there is a case where the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached during the BB game. For example, when the number of AT games is set to "50" and the AT is started, and when the game shifts to the BB game during the AT, the counting of the number of AT games may be interrupted. However, the count of the upper limit "1500" game of the advantageous section is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, as in Example 1 of FIG. When AT is started, the external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that the BB is not won during the advantageous section (the game does not shift to the BB game).
Further, Example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT, and the number of remaining games of the AT is held even when the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games is reached. Even if the AT has the remaining number of games when the 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached.

In addition, in the case where a special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section, if the 1500 game of the advantageous section is completed while the special role is inside, during the special game in which the special role wins and shifts, the "advantageous section" It is not possible to output a production such as "How many times is the special game inside?" This is because the data related to the advantageous section is reset when the 1500 game of the advantageous section is reached. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output the effect as if the advantageous section (AT) continues even during the special game in terms of the appearance of the effect.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data related to the advantageous section stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data related to the advantageous section stored on the sub control board 80 side (transmitted from the main control board 50). Regarding the data (data stored based on the incoming command), there are cases where it is cleared and cases where it is not cleared.
If it is not cleared, it is possible to display a numerical value exceeding "1500" for the number of games played in the advantageous section during the special game.
Further, in the case where a special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section, if an effect such as an ending effect is output, the ending effect may be stopped and the winning of the special role may be announced immediately.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Subsequently, the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or ended with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following Examples 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation, it is an advantageous section.
Further, both at the end of the 1BBA operation and at the end of the 1BBB operation, the transition to non-RT occurs (in this respect, it differs from the first embodiment).

Non-RT maintains an advantageous section. Further, in the non-RT, the replay A alone is not drawn, and the replay C group is drawn (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When the replay C group is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the replay 01 or the replay 03 wins a prize by the operation (luck) of the stop switch 42 of the player. Then, when the replay 01 wins, it shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, it shifts to RT2.

When the replay C group is won in the non-RT, the instruction function may not always be activated, and the instruction function may always be activated (the push order for winning the replay 01 is displayed). Alternatively, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to activate the instruction function when the replay C group is won.
Or, when shifting to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1BBA, the instruction function is activated when the replay C group is elected, and when shifting to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1BBB, the instruction function is activated when the replay C group is elected. May not be activated, and so on.

RT5 is a finite RT and continues 50 games. When 50 games are digested at RT5, the game shifts to RT2.
Then, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is used as an advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when shifting from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, the normal section (non-AT) is set.
Therefore, when the replay 01 wins in the non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the game shifts to RT5 from the next game, and the advantageous section and AT (50 games) are executed. Then, when 50 games have been digested, the process shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when the replay 03 wins in the non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the game shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT) from the next game.
Then, in RT2, a lottery for an advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the above RT transition and AT. (A) shows an example of shifting to AT. In addition, the example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which 1BB was won in RT2 and the game shifted to 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When the game shifts from RT2 to 1BB, the advantageous section starts. Then, when the 1BB game is completed, the game shifts to the non-RT, and when the replay 01 wins in this non-RT, the game shifts to the RT5. At RT5, AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is completed, the advantageous section and the AT are ended, and the process shifts to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 3B, the 1BB game is completed and the game shifts to the non-RT, and the replay 03 wins the prize in this non-RT. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), but shifts to RT2 and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the advantageous section and the start and end of the AT are controlled and managed by the RT (lottery state) or the main control board 50 (regardless of whether the RTs are different or the same). In Example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and AT are started by the RT transition, and the advantageous section and AT are ended by the RT transition.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and AT are started by the transition of the control state, and further, the advantageous section and AT are terminated by the transition of the control state.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes control states of states 1 to 3. In this example, state 1 and state 2 are advantageous sections, and state 3 is a normal section.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly states when the RT2 and the RT3 are switched back and forth in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is a so-called normal state, state 2 is a precursor or a pullback period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In the state 3 (normal), the lottery of the advantageous section is executed. The lottery for the advantageous section is the same as that shown in the first embodiment, for example. Then, when the advantageous section is won in the state 3 and the section shifts to the advantageous section, the precursor shifts to the state 2. Therefore, when the transition to the precursor occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
The precursor corresponds to the preparation period until the AT is started. For example, the number of games of the precursor is determined at the time of transition from the state 3 to the state 2, and the precursor in the state 2 stays until the number of games is exhausted. To do. The instruction function does not operate during the omen. Then, when the number of games in the state 2 (precursor) is exhausted, the game shifts to the AT in the state 1 from the next game. During state 1 (AT), the instruction function is activated.

Further, the state 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied. The number of games played in the state 1 (AT) may be fixed, for example, "50", or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the period shifts to the pullback period of the AT in the state 2. In this pullback period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, "20" games).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period of this state 2 (withdrawal period) (for example, when a rare role is won, or when an AT lottery executed when a rare role is won, for example), the state 1 (for example, when the player wins the AT lottery) Move to AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the pullback period in the state 2, the state shifts to the normal state 3. Then, at the same time as the transition to the state 3, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted.
As described above, the normal section in the state 3 is set as the normal section, the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous section, and when the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the transition condition is satisfied or not. It shifts to AT (state 1) or shifts to state 2 (AT pullback period).

In the example of FIG. 61A, it is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit of the number of ATs is set to "5", after the end of the fifth AT, the state 1 is changed to the state 3 without shifting to the AT pullback period (state 2). Then, it is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 (b) has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
And usually, it is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal times, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed as in the first embodiment, and when the advantageous section is won, the game is shifted to the advantageous section from the next game and a precursor is started. The precursor is a maximum of 32 games (the number of precursor games is determined by lottery). Then, after digesting the number of games of the precursor, it shifts to CZ. CZ is executed until the transition condition to AT is satisfied or the end condition of CZ is satisfied. When the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, the transition to AT is performed. Further, if the end condition of CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, the transition is normal.

Specifically, as conditions for transitioning to AT during CZ, for example, (a) when a transition lottery according to a winning combination is won, (b) when a transition lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning combination is won, (C) When a predetermined specific combination is won, (d) When the number of times a predetermined specific combination is won exceeds the specified number, (e) When shifting to a specific RT, (f) Predetermined Various transition conditions can be set according to the playability, such as when a special role is won.
Similarly, the end conditions of CZ are as follows: (a) when the conditions for transition to AT during CZ are not satisfied, (b) when a specific fallen combination is won, and (c) for each game regardless of the winning combination. Various end conditions can be set according to the playability, such as when a fall lottery is won.
Further, the conditions for shifting to AT in CZ and the conditions for ending CZ mentioned here may be set as opposite conditions.

AT is executed in the same manner as in (a) above. Then, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, the system shifts to CZ. The CZ after the end of AT is positioned in the pullback period of (a) above. If the transition condition to AT is satisfied again during this CZ, the transition to AT can be performed, but if the termination condition of CZ is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to AT, the transition to normal is performed. At the same time as this transition to normal, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is started.

In principle, the instruction function operation game is executed during AT, but since the instruction function is also in the state 2 of FIG. 61 (a) or the CZ or omen of FIG. 61 (b), the instruction function is executed. It is possible to perform an actuating game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once after shifting to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. 61 (a), the first small during the transitioning state 2 (precursor) from the state 3 The game in which the role B group is won may be regarded as an instruction function operating game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), among the 32 games of the precursor, the game in which the small winning combination B group is first won is set as the instruction function operating game.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having a control state of a precursor, CZ, and AT, as in FIG. 61 (b). However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which the transition to AT could not be performed is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when shifting from normal to precursory, the game shifts to CZ after a predetermined number of games (up to 32 games). If the transition condition to AT is satisfied during this CZ, the transition to AT is performed as shown in (b), but when the end condition of CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to AT is satisfied (for example, the predetermined number of games (32 games)). ) Digestion) shifts to the pullback period. In the pullback period, the lottery for transition to CZ is performed again, and if the transition condition to CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to normal (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied, the transition to CZ is performed (for example, the transition to CZ is performed. In the figure, (c) shows an example of shifting to CZ again (successful pullback example)).

Then, during the CZ, as described above, the lottery for the transition to the AT is performed, but if the end condition of the CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the transition to the withdrawal period is performed again. Then, in the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pullback period, the end condition of CZ (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (pullback failure) before the transition condition to CZ is satisfied. This is an example of a normal transition.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section can be controlled with the transition to RT, and AT or the like can be freely executed during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, when a plurality of control states not related to RT are provided, a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed during this normal section, and a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won, it is advantageous. Shift to one of the control states corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games), and the control state is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is ended. It shifts to the control state corresponding to the normal section.

In the example of FIG. 61, when the AT is executed, the ART can be executed if the AT is executed at the RT with a high probability of replay. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay B group in RT2, and the replay 02 is performed. It is possible to display the push order to be displayed and shift to RT3.

In this way, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous section, a plurality of control states (precursor, CZ, AT) can be freely designed. Further, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, it is also possible to combine all of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of end conditions in one advantageous section, and by doing so, a wider range of playability can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60A shows that the advantageous section ends when the number of games of RT5 executed during the advantageous section reaches 50 games.
Further, the example of FIG. 60B shows that the advantageous section ends by shifting from the non-RT to the RT2 by displaying the replay 03 during the non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions, "digestion of 50 games at RT5" and "transition from non-RT to RT2", are set as the end conditions of the advantageous section. In other words, it positions non-RT as a CZ whether it is promoted to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). The big concept is that the advantageous section is terminated when a specific RT shift is triggered.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the normal section are shifted according to the control state regardless of which RT is stayed.
In the example of FIG. 61A, the state 1 and the state 2 (precursor or AT pullback period) are advantageous sections, and the state 3 is set as a normal section. Then, it is shown that the advantageous section starts by shifting from the state 3 to the state 1 or the state 2, and the advantageous section ends by shifting from the state 1 or the state 2 to the state 3.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c), the normal section of the control state is the normal section, and the precursor of the control state, CZ, and AT are the advantageous sections. Then, it is shown that the advantageous section starts by shifting from the normal to the precursor, CZ, or AT, and the advantageous section ends by shifting from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, when the control state is normal, it is a normal section, but when the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section is executed. However, even during the advantageous section, AT is not executed in the precursor or CZ, and in order for AT to be executed, it is necessary to satisfy the transition condition of AT in the precursor or CZ. On the other hand, even if the vehicle falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or falls from CZ to the pullback period (precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which a first finite RT (20 games) and a second finite RT (60 games) are provided and the end condition of the advantageous section is set to the digestion of the first finite RT or the second finite RT. Such an advantageous section By setting the end condition of, for example, by providing a case of shifting from a non-RT in an advantageous section to a first finite RT of 20 games and a case of shifting to a second finite RT of 60 games, a benefit to the player. Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn in a non-RT in an advantageous section, and a symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or a symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed depending on the push order when the specific replay is won. Let me. Then, at the time of winning the specific replay, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games according to the push order operated by the player, it is about 3 depending on which finite RT is shifted. It is possible to make the game playable so that a double profit difference can be generated.

Further, when the specific replay is won during non-RT, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the push order. In that case, a specification that determines whether to notify the push order to shift to the first finite RT or the second finite RT is considered in consideration of the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning during non-RT. Be done. At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may be either one having a setting difference or one having no setting difference.
Further, the end condition of the advantageous section is set only for the digestion of the first finite RT, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set so as not to end in the digestion of the second finite RT. As a result, when shifting from non-RT to the second finite RT of 60 games, the advantageous section is not terminated even after the digestion of the 60 games, and by shifting to non-RT again, the second finite RT and non-RT It is possible to have a playability that loops.

In this case, when the non-RT is changed to the first finite RT, the advantageous section ends when the finite RT of 20 games is exhausted, but when the non-RT is changed to the second finite RT, the finite of 60 games is finite. After digesting RT, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to shift from non-RT to the second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add an advantageous section by winning a combination having a setting difference in the advantageous section, but in the case of such playability, if there is a setting difference in the specific replay. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition role to a finite RT with a different number of games. In this way, by devising the end condition of the advantageous section, a substantial addition of 20 games or 60 games by the winning combination having a setting difference (transition of 20 games to the first finite RT, or the second of 60 games). (Transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) Example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is set to the digestion of CZ or the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game By setting the end condition of such an advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section A maximum of 32 CZ games are executed, and the conditions for clearing this CZ are set as the winning of a special role. Then, if 32 games are digested without winning a special role during CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if a special role is won during CZ, after the special game is completed, the game is shifted to non-RT. Depending on the order, the symbol combination that shifts to RT1 or the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed.

Then, "the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game" is set as the end condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the specific replay is won, if the player shifts to RT1 depending on the push order, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the transition from non-RT to RT2 is made after the end of the special game, AT is started. Here, depending on the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the push order of shifting to RT2 at the time of winning a specific replay having no setting difference. This means that the special role won during CZ is not limited to the special role having no setting difference, and may be a special role having a setting difference. By winning a special combination regardless of the presence or absence of a setting difference during CZ in the advantageous section, it is possible to substantially grant AT (identification of winning during non-RT after the end of the special game) By replaying, it is possible to notify the push order in which the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed).

Further, in the above-mentioned examples (1) and (2), although RT is used as the control state, various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), two types of finite RTs (first finite RT and second finite RT) having different numbers of games are adopted, which are the game state 1, the game state 2, and the game. It may be replaced with the state 3. Here, the game state is a control state executed during the advantageous section and is the above-mentioned CZ, AT, or the like, but unlike RT, the winning probability of the replay does not fluctuate.
By this replacement, the game state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, the game state 2 in 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and the game state 3 in 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section can be obtained. .. Also, unlike RT, there are no restrictions on the transition conditions (for example, a specific symbol combination is displayed, special role winning, special role winning, end of special game, digestion of the number of games, etc.), so various conditions are free. Can be set to.
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, conditions such as "winning the bell 5 times within 20 games" and "winning the bell 3 games in a row" in the game state 1 in the advantageous section. It is also possible to design so as to shift to the game state 2 when the above is achieved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, when the advantageous section approaches the upper limit of 1500 games during AT, the advantageous section is terminated before the upper limit of 1500 games is reached, and the advantageous section is relatively advantageous after the end of the advantageous section. By providing a situation in which it is easy to win a section and an AT, it is possible to repeatedly execute an advantageous section and an AT that does not reach the maximum number of games. As a result, it is possible to create an advantageous section in which the upper limit of 1500 games is executed and a more advantageous state than AT.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 in the first embodiment. In the RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that it has RT6. RT6 is a finite RT and ends with the digestion of 50 games.
RT6 can be migrated only from RT3. Further, after the end of RT6, it shifts to non-RT.

In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except the internal section (RT4), a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed during the normal section. In addition, the lottery for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed regardless of the winning of the conditional device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being linked to the winning of the conditional device having no setting difference. The winning probability is "1/32", which is common to all RTs.

In addition, after the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation are completed, the user has the right to execute the AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and after the operation of 1BBB is completed, it shifts to RT1. Further, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, the process shifts to RT2. After that, it goes back and forth between RT2 and RT3 (here, it is assumed that the rare case of accidentally shifting from RT3 to RT6 is not considered).

In the above, in the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, the transition lottery to the advantageous section is executed with the winning probability of "1/32". Therefore, if the transition lottery to the advantageous section is won, 1BBA operation or 1BBB is performed. In the situation where the right to execute AT is based on the operation, the advantageous section and AT are started. Since AT can be executed on condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function), it is advantageous to shift to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is completed, respectively. Before winning the section, AT will not start even if you have the right to AT.

When the advantageous section and AT are started in non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the small winning combination B group until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is to display the pattern and to shift to RT2 as soon as possible. When the small winning combination C group is won, the instruction function is activated. After shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated in both the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group. Further, when the replay B group is won in RT2, the instruction function is activated so as to shift to RT3. In this way, the AT is executed until the end condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in RT3, the replay D group is drawn instead of the replay C group. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the type of the replay D group drawn in RT3, the winning combination, and the relationship between the push order and the display combination, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay D group has replays D1 to replay D3, and replays D1 to replay D3 include replay 01, replay 03, and replay 06, respectively.
Then, in the case where any of the replay D groups is won, the replay 01 wins in one push order, the replay 03 wins in the other push order, and the replay 06 wins in the other push order. Is set to win a prize.

Here, the point that RT3 is maintained when replay 01 is displayed in RT3 and falls to RT2 when replay 02 is displayed is the same as in the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins in RT3, it shifts to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the lottery for replay 06 is not performed during the operation of 1BBA and the operation of 1BBB. In the sixth embodiment, the replay 06 is included only in the replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, in the case of staying in RT3 and having an advantageous section and AT, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is less than "1400" and the player wins the replay D group, the replay 01 is won. The push order to be operated, that is, the push order to maintain RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, in the case of staying in RT3 and having an advantageous section and AT, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is "1400" or more, that is, when the remaining advantageous section is "100" or less. Displays the push order for winning the replay 06 by the operation of the instruction function in the subsequent games in which the replay D group is won.

As a result, the replay 06 wins in the game, so the game shifts to RT6 from the next game. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set in the advantageous section and the end condition of AT. Therefore, with the transition to RT6, the advantageous section and AT are terminated.
As described above, since the replay D group is a duplicate winning of the replay that has the possibility of shifting the RT, it is desirable that there is no setting difference (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the replay D group). It does not prevent you from doing it).

RT6 is a finite RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games are digested in RT6, it is judged that the end condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the game shifts to non-RT.
Further, as described above, in RT6 as well, as in other RTs, a lottery of an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32". Then, if the advantageous section is won in RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. That is, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes "1400" or more in RT3 and the game shifts to RT6, the advantageous section and AT are terminated, and "winning the lottery in the advantageous section in RT6" is the execution (restart) of AT. ) It is set in the condition.
In RT6, the winning probability of the advantageous section is "1/32" and the number of games is "50". Therefore, the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

When the advantageous section is won in RT6, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game and the execution condition of AT is satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started during the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, that is, while staying at RT6. Alternatively, the AT may be started from the non-RT when the transition to the non-RT, or further, the AT may be started after the transition from the non-RT to the RT2. Here, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, it is assumed that the AT is started from the next game of the game in which the advantageous section is won.

In RT6, when the advantageous section and the AT are started at the same time from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the AT can be continued up to the limit of 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. Can be done. Since 1500 games in the advantageous section are counted even in the control state such as precursors and CZ performed in the advantageous section, the AT is compared with the game playability in which the AT is performed via such a control state. It can be executed for a long time.

When RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. When the lottery of the advantageous section is won in RT6, the push order for activating the instruction function and shifting to RT3 at the time of winning the replay B group is displayed in RT2.

Then, when the AT is won in RT6, when the transition to RT3 is performed, AT is executed while maintaining RT3. AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT is completed a predetermined number of games, the AT is ended and the advantageous section is ended, and the normal section is started from the next game.
An initial value of the number of AT games is determined when the AT is won, and the number of games is added by the above-mentioned addition during AT execution. Then, during the execution of AT, when 1400 games or more have been played since the start of the advantageous section, the game is shifted to RT6 in the same manner as described above.

On the other hand, during the normal section, the lottery for the advantageous section is also performed in RT2 and RT3 with a winning probability of "1/32". That is, in the sixth embodiment, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with a probability of "1/32" regardless of staying in any RT except RT4, and if the lottery of the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game. Move to.

In RT2 and RT3, when only shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the first small winning combination B group. As a result, since the condition that the advantageous section of "execution of the instruction function operating game at least once" can be terminated is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3 (normal section) that do not go through 1BBA game or 1BBB game, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of "1/32", and if the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game, and the advantageous section is started. When the instruction function operating game (when the small winning combination B group is won) is executed once in the section, the transition from the next game to the normal section is repeated.
Not limited to this, when shifting to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and after the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, the section may shift to the normal section. In this case, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once in a predetermined number of games.

Further, in RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal), an AT lottery is separately executed. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the player has the right to execute the AT. For example, when the small winning combination E1 shown in the first embodiment is won, it is possible to have the right to execute the AT. Alternatively, when the small winning combination E1 is won, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to grant the execution right of the AT, and when the lottery is won, the execution right of the AT may be granted.
The initial value of the number of AT games is set first, and then the number of games is added by performing an additional lottery as shown in the third embodiment.

Further, if the game in which the AT is won is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. The AT may be started from the next game of the game in which the AT is won, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through a precursor or a CZ. After starting the AT, the AT is executed while staying at the RT3 in the same manner as described above (ART). If AT is still ongoing even after 1400 games or more after shifting to the advantageous section, the transition to RT6 is performed in the same manner as described above.
On the other hand, if the game won in the AT is a normal section, the player has the right to execute the AT and waits to win the advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section is won, AT is executed thereafter.

Further, when the AT lottery is performed as described above during the stay of RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the AT start condition to be via RT6.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, "the right to execute AT" is given based on the fact that the small winning combination E1 or the like is won. When this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, wait for the advantageous section to be won, if it becomes an advantageous section or if it is an advantageous section, activate the instruction function, and if it is RT2, replay group B The push order to shift to RT3 at the time of winning is displayed. Further, when it is RT3, the push order for shifting to RT6 is displayed when the replay D group is won. When shifting to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when the advantageous section is won between the 50 games of RT6, the AT start condition is satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied in RT6 is the same as described above.

The lottery for the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and a specific combination having a winning probability of "1/32" may be drawn at all RTs, and the advantageous section may be started based on the winning of this specific combination. .. The specific combination in this case is a combination having no setting difference, as described in the first embodiment.

When the above sixth embodiment is rearranged, it has the following features (including effects).
(1) By intentionally ending the advantageous section and shifting to the re-lottery state of the advantageous section before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, can be effectively achieved. It is possible to execute an advantageous section beyond that. For example, a game such as "advantageous section (1200 games)-> non-advantageous section (50 games)-> advantageous section (1200 games)" is possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the transition from RT3 to RT6 occurs, but during the 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is A high favorable condition can be maintained.
(2) In addition, at normal times, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32" for each game. In particular, as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, a transition opportunity that does not have a setting difference is required, but in both RT6 and normal times, a lottery to shift to an advantageous section is always made with a winning probability of "1/32". It can be realized by doing.

Furthermore, depending on the design, "start of AT = start of advantageous section" can be set as in the third embodiment. Therefore, 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, are fully used, for example, 1500 games. AT becomes feasible (except when starting AT when a special role is won).
(3) At the time of transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT by referring to the RT being executed. A transition lottery for an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of each game "1/32", but when winning this transition lottery, refer to the RT (whether or not it is RT6) that was staying at the time of winning. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

<7th Embodiment>
The seventh embodiment brings benefits to the player even when the total number of games played by the AT exceeds "1500" as a result of adding the number of games during the AT, and further, the total number of games of the AT. It is a feature that the more times the number of games is added exceeding "1500", the more the player is benefited.

In the seventh embodiment, the "over 1500 counter" is provided, which counts the number of times the total number of games of the AT exceeds "1500" due to the addition during the AT. At the start of the advantageous section and AT, the counter value over 1500 is "0".
Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (Example 2) of the third embodiment, when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" as a result of the additional lottery, the determined additional number is used. It shall be cleared without adding.

Therefore, when the total number of AT games is "1500" or less, the counter over 1500 remains "0". Here, for example, in step S451 of FIG. 44 (b), if it is determined that the number of additions exceeds the specified number, the “over 1500 counter” changes from “0” to “1”. Similarly, after that, in step S451 of FIG. 44 (b), when it is determined that the number of additions exceeds the specified number, the “over 1500 counter” changes from “1” to “2”. In this way, every time the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", a counter over 1500 is added.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the advantageous section and the AT are started, the game at the time of winning the first small winning combination B group activates the instruction function. After that, when the counter over 1500 is "0", that is, when the total number of AT games has never exceeded "1500" by the lottery, whether to activate the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won. Whether or not to decide by lottery.
Here, the rate at which the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won is referred to as an "instruction function operation rate".

Then, the instruction function operation rate when the counter over 1500 is "0" is set to "95%". Therefore, during the advantageous section and during AT, when the small winning combination B group is won, for example, a lottery for whether or not to activate the instruction function (a lottery for winning at 95%) is performed. As a result, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 95%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning rate of the small winning combination B group when the instruction function is activated is 100% and the winning rate of the small winning combination B group when the instruction function is not activated is "1/3", the instruction function operating rate is 95%. The winning rate of the small role B group in the above is about 96.7%.

Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" as a result of the addition during AT. Then, it is assumed that the counter over 1500 becomes "1". Here, the instruction function operating rate when the counter over 1500 is "1" is set to "97.5%". Therefore, in the advantageous section and during AT, when the small winning combination B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 97.5%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 2.5%.

After that, as a result of further addition, when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" again, the counter over 1500 becomes "2". The instruction function operation rate in this case is set to "98.75%". Therefore, in the advantageous section and during AT, when the small winning combination B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 98.75%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, for the counter value over 1500 = "0", "1", "2", ..., The instruction function operating rate = "95", "97.5", "98.75". , ... is defined.

With the above settings, the more the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", that is, the larger the counter value over 1500, the closer the instruction function operation rate becomes to 100%. Here, even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually "1500", so it is certain that the games exceeding "1500" cannot be executed. Is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", it is more advantageous to the player than before the addition (expected number of acquired cards). It is possible to set to increase the value).

<8th Embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, the winning of the BB having no setting difference in the winning probability (for example, in the first embodiment, the single winning of 1BBA, the overlapping winning of 1BBA and the small winning combination D, and the overlapping of the 1BBA and the small winning combination E1). When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning), the advantageous section is started after that. In addition, there is a case where AT is started after the end of the BB game.
Further, regarding the end of the advantageous section, the following Examples 1 to 5 can be mentioned.
(1) An example in which the advantageous section ends before the end of the 1BB game (Example 1)
(2) An example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of the 1BB game (Example 2)
(3) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT starts after the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section also ends at the end of the AT (Example 3).
(4) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, but the advantageous section ends after the lapse of a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the end of the 1BB game (Example 4).
(5) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT is started after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed since the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section also ends at the end of the AT (Example 5).
Then, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is determined at the same time which of Examples 1 to 5 ends the advantageous section. Of course, it is not necessary to determine from the five of Examples 1 to 5, for example, it may be determined from the three of Examples 1 to 3, or it may be determined from the two of Examples 2 and 3. You may.

64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 described above.
In Example 1 of FIG. 64, after winning 1BBA, the advantageous section is started from the start of the 1BBA game (when the 1BBA is activated). The start timing of this advantageous section is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, from the start of the next game of the game winning the 1BBA to the start of the next game of the game in which the 1BBA has won ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing as long as it is until (at the start of the first game of 1BBA game). Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Further, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game, but the AT is not started because the 1BBA is in operation (in the first place, in Example 1, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

Then, in Example 1, the advantageous section ends before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the previous game of the final game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the final game of the 1BBA game.
Further, in this example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. Similar to the first embodiment, the continuous production is a series of productions over a plurality of games (a production that raises the expectation of whether or not AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game), and at the end of the continuous production, 1 Outputs an effect of notifying the player whether or not to start AT after the end of the BBA game. In addition, the advantageous section ends when the continuous production ends.

Therefore, in Example 1, in the middle of the final game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous production is ended (finally, it is notified that the AT is not started), and at the end of the game in which the continuous production is finished, or continuously. When the production is finished, the advantageous section is finished. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it is decided to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, a rare role (for example, a small role D) is won during the 1BBA game, etc. When the condition for extending the advantageous section (also referred to as the condition for changing the advantageous section; the same applies hereinafter) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 1 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

Example 2 of FIG. 64 is an example in which the end time of the 1BBA game and the end time of the advantageous section are matched. In this example 2, as in the case of the first example, the continuous production is started from the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (may be when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), the 1BBA game. Notifies whether or not to start the AT game after the end of. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of the 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous production, it is notified that the AT will not be started.

When the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game) as in Example 1 and Example 2, the advantageous section ends even if the instruction function operating game has not been performed even once. It is possible. This is because many medals have already been won during the special game (1BBA game), so it is not necessary to postpone the end of the advantageous section just for performing one instruction function operating game. Rather, the extension may increase player dissatisfaction.
Further, as in Example 1, at the start of the 1BBA game, even when it is decided to end the advantageous section at the end of the 1BBA game, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when a rare role is won), the advantageous section may not be ended at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 2 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

In Example 3 of FIG. 65, as in Example 2, continuous production is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (may be when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), it is notified that the AT will be started after the end of the 1BBA game. Then, the AT is started from the next game of the final game of the 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT immediately after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, or the next game of the game won in any of the replay B group. In this case, it is preferable that at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 is activated even before the start of AT.
The AT ends when the end conditions of the AT such as the digestion of the predetermined number of games are satisfied, and the advantageous section also ends at the same time when the AT ends. However, even if the AT is terminated, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

Whether it is the above Example 1, Example 2, or Example 3 is not known at the start of the 1BBA game, but at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, so that it is possible to shift to the advantageous section. When it is decided, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up (determined to shift to the advantageous section) or does not light up (advantageous section) at the start of the 1BBA game, as in the case where it was always made to be Example 3. It is possible to arouse the expectation of the player even during the 1BBA game by eliminating the monotonous playability that arouses the expectation just because it is decided not to shift to.

In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous production is started after the end of the 1BBA game, and in the continuous production, whether or not to start AT from now on (the advantageous section continues). This is an example of notifying (whether or not to do). After the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous production is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which the continuous production is performed in 5 games. Of course, the continuous production may be any number of games. Then, in the final game of the continuous production, it is notified whether or not to start the AT. Example 4 shows an example in which AT is not started. Then, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous production. Of course, the continuous production may start from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may start from the next game or the like.

As described above, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed for 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to "execute the instruction function operating game at least once during the advantageous section".
Here, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the BB, and the advantageous section is started at the same time (of course, not necessarily at the same time) as the start of the BB game, the end of the BB game. Later, when ending the advantageous section in several games, it is conceivable to control as follows.

(1) If the small winning combination B group is never won between the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operating game even once.
(2) When the small winning combination B group is won during the five games, the instruction function operating game is executed in that game.
(3) Even when the small winning combination B group is won during the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operating game.
(4) If you have never won the small role B group between the 5 games, extend the advantageous section until you first win the small role B group, and instruct when you first win the small role B group. The function-operated game is executed, and the advantageous section is ended in the game.
Any of the above controls may be used.
As described above, since it is necessary to "execute the instruction function operating game at least once during the advantageous section", the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable, but in Example 4. As described above, when the BB game is performed during the advantageous section, many medals have already been won during the BB game, so the end of the advantageous section is terminated only for one instruction function operation game. This is because it is considered that there is no need to extend it. Rather, the extension may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the case where an instruction is given (the instruction function operating game is executed) during the five games is shown by a two-dot chain line.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, as in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous production is started after the end of the 1BBA game, and whether or not the AT is started by the continuous production is determined. This is an example of notifying. Then, in Example 5, it is notified that the AT will be started in the final game of the continuous production. Then, from the next game, AT is started. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game won in any of the replay B group, and the like. In this case, it is preferable that at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 is activated even before the start of AT.
Whether it is the above Example 4 or Example 5 is not known at the start of the 1BBA game, but at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED77 lights up, so that both during the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BB game It is possible to fuel the expectations of the player.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to execute the AT (Examples 1 to 5) and the initial number of AT games are determined before the start of the 1BBA game (for example, when the 1BBA is won) or the start of the 1BBA game. Occasionally, it may be decided by lottery or the like, or it may be decided whether or not to execute the AT based on the conditional device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, it is decided in Example 1, Example 2, or Example 4, and it is decided whether or not to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the conditional device won during the 1BBA game. .. Further, for example, when the "1BBA + small winning combination E1" in the first embodiment is won, the AT may be confirmed (Example 3 or Example 5).
Furthermore, whether or not to execute the AT and the initial number of games of the AT may be determined based on the conditions satisfied during the 1BBA game. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), the number of AT games may be added during the 1BBA game or during the AT based on the winning of the conditional device.
Further, although it was determined as in Example 4 at the start of the 1BBA game, when the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game or during the continuous production period of the 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game (for example,). (At the time of winning the rare role) may be changed to Example 5 (execution of AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game, depending on whether or not the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When deciding whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as shown in Example 2 of FIG. Then, when it is decided to execute the AT during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is executed.

<9th embodiment>
The ninth embodiment defines when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination (for example, 1BBA). Yes, in particular, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is started from the game in which the winning special role can win a prize.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is started based on the fact that the condition device including the winning of the special combination (1BBA) is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when the condition device including the special combination is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the betting state and the settlement possible state in the next game of the winning game are set. By that time, you can bet in the next game of the game in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the state and the state where the payment can be made are reached).

Further, the advantageous section is started at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated) of the game won by the condition device including the special combination, or at the start of the first game of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) (for example, 1BBA game). When the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination, the start timing has a range.
Then, in the ninth embodiment, when the condition device including the special combination is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special combination can win a prize. To do.

Therefore, for example, in the first embodiment, when 1BBA is won alone, 1BBA can be won in the game, so that the advantageous section is started from the game.
On the other hand, when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won, the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped. do not. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game in which "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won, the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized over 1BBA, and the small winning combination E1 is "PB = 1". 1BBA never wins. The 1BBA won in the game will be carried over to the next game.

Furthermore, when "1BBA + small winning combination D" is won, the winning of the small winning combination D is prioritized in the game, but the small winning combination 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small winning combination D is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the symbol related to the small winning combination 35 (“watermelon”) cannot be stopped and at the timing when the symbol related to 1BBA (“red 7”) can be stopped, 1BBA is set in the game. It is possible to win a prize. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop is set and the third “red 7” can stop at the effective line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both the symbols of 1BBA and the small winning combination 35 can be stopped, the priority is given to stopping the symbols related to the small winning combination 35. For example, it is the case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when both the 2nd "red 7" and the 5th "watermelon" can be stopped at the effective line with the right first stop.
On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 7th "red 7" can stop at the effective line at the time of the first left stop, the 4th or 9th "watermelon" is stopped at the effective line. Is prioritized, so the 7th "Red 7" does not stop at the valid line.
Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above timing, the stop control that does not substantially stop the 7th "red 7" on the effective line is executed. As a result, the game at the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination D" in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to "a game in which 1BBA can be won". Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop is set and the third "red 7" can stop at the effective line, 1 BBA can be won in the game, so "1 BBA". May be a game that can win a prize.

If it is decided to win a conditional device including a special role and shift to an advantageous section, and the game does not correspond to a game in which a special role can be won, in the lottery of the conditional device in the next game, for example. In the case of non-winning, the special role carried over from winning can be won, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, the lottery of the condition device is performed and the player is not elected. Therefore, the advantageous section immediately after the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the condition device is performed. (At the same time or just before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up).

On the other hand, as a result of winning a small role or replay in the next game and giving priority to winning the small role or replay won in the game, the advantageous section is not started in the game in which the special role cannot be won.
In addition, for example, in a game in which the winning of a special role is carried over, in a game in which a small role of "PB ≠ 1" is won and the small role cannot be won, the special role carrying over the winning can be won. , As in the case of winning the above-mentioned "1BBA + small winning combination D", the advantageous section is not started in the game. Of course, in a game in which a special role carrying over the winning can be won, an advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a flow of the game according to the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, an example is shown in which "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won in the "N" game and 1BBA is won in the "N + 3" game.
First, when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won in the "N" game, only the small winning combination E1 can win in the game, and 1BBA cannot win, so that the advantageous section is not started in the game.

Next, after the "N + 1" game, the winning of 1BBA is carried over. In the "N + 1" game, an example of winning Replay A is shown. At the time of winning Replay A, Replay 01 wins with "PB = 1", and 1BBA carrying over the winning cannot win, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

Next, in the "N + 2" game, an example is shown in which the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61. Therefore, in the game, 1 BBA carrying over the winning can be won. Therefore, the advantageous section is started from the "N + 2" game. Here, it is advantageous based on the fact that the "N + 2" game starts, that is, the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device is drawn, and as a result, the player is not elected (1 BBA can be won). Since the section is started, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also started when the start switch 41 is operated.

A player who wins 1 BBA in the "N + 2" game can eliminate the wasteful consumption of the number of games in the advantageous section. As described above, the player who has won 1 BBA in the "N + 2" game is an internal medium game in which the addition or the like (including the lottery for whether or not to execute the AT in the eighth embodiment) cannot be performed. It is not necessary to start the advantageous section. Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is set for the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section starts in the internal middle game, the maximum advantage that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game. The number of games in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal games. For example, if 10 games are played in the internal middle game, 1 game is played in the game in which 1 BBA is won, and 16 games are played in 1 BBA game, in the game after the 1 BBA game, only 1473 games can be played in the advantageous section at the maximum. I can't do it.

However, the player who won 1 BBA in the "N + 2" game does not consume the amount consumed in the internal medium game (0 game in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1 BBA is won, 16 games in 1 BBA game). In the game after the 1BBA game is completed, a maximum of 1483 games can be played in the advantageous section), so that the player who could not win the 1BBA in the "N + 2" game , May be advantageous. On the other hand, the player who could not win 1 BBA in the "N + 2" game will continue the internal middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1 BBA could not be won in the "N + 2" game.

Further, in the "N + 3" game, as in the "N + 2" game, an example is shown in which the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61. Therefore, in the game, 1 BBA carrying over the winning can be won. Then, an example in which 1 BBA can be won in the "N + 3" game is shown. As a result, the 1BBA game is started from the "N + 4" game.

Here, for example, if the advantageous section is uniformly set to start from the start of the 1BBA game, the number of games varies depending on the skill of the player's eyes from the time of winning the 1BBA to the winning (medal consumption). Although there is a difference in the number of medals), there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the skill of the player (whether or not he / she noticed the winning of the special role, or when he / she knew that the special role was won, he / she became a special role without any mistakes in pressing. The number of games in the advantageous section that is wasted varies depending on whether or not the combination of the corresponding symbols can be stopped at the effective line).

For example, if the special role can be won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the advantageous section will not be wasted in the internal middle game after the advantageous section is started.
On the other hand, in the first game in which a special role can be won, if the special role cannot be won due to a failure to press the button, etc., the special role can be won again in the next game or later. You have to wait until. However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special role can be won, the advantageous section is wasted during that period.
In this way, it is possible to make the actual number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games after the end of the special game) different depending on the skill of the player.

Examples of modifications of the ninth embodiment include the following examples.
(Modification example 1)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section at the earlier of the game in which the number of games is exhausted, the next game thereof, or the special game starts (the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped). ..
(Modification 2)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section, whichever comes first, the game that has exhausted the number of games, the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can win a prize.

(Modification example 3)
Even if the winning special role starts the advantageous section from the first game in which the winning special role can be won, the end condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of the special role, the player wins the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed after the end of the special game. In this case, for the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted at the same time as the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous section is started from the first game in which the winning special combination can be won, the 50 games of AT start counting at the same time as the start of AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the "1500" game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the winning special role can be won. By doing so, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of AT games is added), the skill of the player is affected.

(Modification example 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when the condition device including the special combination is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special combination can win a prize. The advantageous section may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be won (the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by the time when the bet is possible and the settlement is possible in the next game. ). By doing so, when the special role is won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the game in which the special role is won is not counted as the game in the advantageous section, so that the player with skill May be even more advantageous than an unskilled player.

In the ninth embodiment, a game in which a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of a special role (1BBA) is won, or a continuous production (for example, 3 games) from the next game to a plurality of games (for example, 3 games) It is an effect of inciting whether or not 1BBA) has been won, and an effect indicating that a special role (1BBA) has been won in the final game) may be output. Of course, the game that won the condition device (for example, small role E1) that does not include the winning of the special role (1BBA), or the continuous production (special role (1BBA)) from the next game to multiple games (for example, 3 games) is won. It is a production that encourages whether or not it is done, and it is necessary to output a production (a production that indicates that the special role (1BBA) has not been won in the final game).

Then, when the continuous effect is output (in particular, before the effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has been won is performed, for example, when the continuous effect over 3 games is output from the next game, 2 games When 1BBA can be won in the eyes (that is, "N + 2" game), the advantageous section display LED77 lights up for the game, and it is known that the player has won 1BBA. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be output as it is, or instead of the continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output.

Alternatively, during the plurality of games in which the continuous effect is output, even if 1 BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on. Specifically, a game that wins a conditional device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including a special combination (1BBA), or a predetermined number of games (the same number or more as the number of games that output a continuous effect) from the next game. During the period, even if the special role (1BBA) can be won, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED77 is not turned on), but after a predetermined number of games, the special role (1BBA) can be won first. When it becomes, the advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned on).

<10th Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when 1BBA is won during the execution of AT (that is, during the advantageous section) and the game shifts to the 1BBA game, the game shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to AT) after the end of the 1BBA game. At times, it is characterized in that the number of AT games (that is, the number of games in an advantageous section) can be added.
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when the AT is being executed in RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to the AT of 100 games (that is, the advantageous section) at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and the AT is being executed), It is assumed that 1BBA is won (either 1BBA alone or 1BBA and small winning combination E1 are duplicated). If 1BBA is won and 1BBA is not won in the game, it shifts to RT4 (inside). Then, when 1BBA wins, it shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). When the end condition during 1BBA operation (1BBA game) is satisfied, the process shifts to non-RT.

1 When the BBA game is completed and the game shifts to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is being prepared (for example, the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, or the replay B group. The AT is restarted from the next game of the crab-winning game, etc. Therefore, it is preferable to operate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 during AT preparation, even before starting AT. Of course, it is an advantageous section even during AT preparation.) When the AT is set to start from that point, when the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. When any of the replay B groups is won in RT2, the instruction function is activated to display the push order for winning the replay 02. When Replay 02 wins in RT2, it shifts to RT3. Then, after that, AT is continued while maintaining RT3. If RT2 is set during AT preparation, basically, AT is restarted after shifting to RT3.

Here, based on the shift from RT2 to RT3, it is possible to add the number of AT games (that is, the advantageous section). This addition may be carried out at all times, or it may be decided by lottery whether or not to add. As an opportunity to add, the replay B group will be elected (that is, it will be added even if it does not shift from RT2 to RT3. Of course, when AT is being prepared, AT can be started from this point. ), Replay 02 winning, and transition from RT2 to RT3.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the addition can be executed based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via the non-RT after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, the winning of 1BBA, the execution of the 1BBA game, or the non-RT stay is stored. For example, it can be stored using a flag. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (may be when the replay group B is won or when the replay 02 is won), it is determined whether or not the flag is on, and it is determined that the flag is on. It is possible to add the number of AT games to the condition. In addition, when an additional or additional lottery is executed, the flag is turned from on to off.

In this way, if it is determined whether or not it is possible to add using the flag, for example, the state of just going back and forth between RT2 and RT3 (simply, during the execution of AT, the push order is mistaken and the image is shifted to RT2. (When shifting to RT3 again), since the flag is off, it is not added when shifting from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example, but even when 1BBB, that is, a conditional device including a special combination having a setting difference is won, it can be executed if the above addition is made.
In the same manner as above, the winning of 1BBB, the execution of the 1BBB game, or the stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. Then, after the end of the 1BBB game, when the transition from RT1 to RT2 and then to RT3 (may be when the replay B group is won or when the replay 02 wins), the addition can be executed. .. As a result, even when a player wins 1BBB (when the game shifts to 1BBB game), which has a setting difference that should not be able to be added during the winning or BB game, the player is expected to be added. Can be done.

Further, the addition may be made feasible based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, the addition may be executed based on the fact that the small winning combination B group is won in non-RT or RT1, the pattern symbol is displayed, and the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, it shifts to non-RT even when the RWM53 is initialized, but since the above-mentioned flag is turned off with the initialization of the RWM53, it shifts from non-RT to RT2 and further from RT2 to RT3. Even if it does, the addition will not be executed. Moreover, if it is a normal section in the first place, the addition is not executed.
Further, when 1BBA or 1BBB is won during the execution of AT and the game shifts to RT4 (internal), the number of AT games is not added to RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, the transition to non-RT was performed, and after the end of the 1BBB game, the transition to RT1 was performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following methods are also possible.
After the end of the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BBB game, the transition to RT5 (newly added) is performed. Then, in RT5, a condition device that is a duplicate winning of a plurality of replays is drawn, the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the winning of a predetermined replay. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the fact that the pattern symbol is displayed. In addition, non-RT, RT2 and RT3 are set so as not to shift to RT5.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (winning the condition device at RT5, displaying the predetermined replay, winning the small winning combination B group at RT5, and the pattern symbol were displayed. Based on this, or the transition from RT5 to RT3), the number of AT games can be added, and it is not necessary to set the above-mentioned flag.

<11th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number "250") that shifts to the advantageous section when winning in the normal section and the winning in the normal section Also provided a small winning combination E1 (number of positions "750") that does not shift to the advantageous section.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, if any small winning combination E1 is won in the normal section, it shifts to the advantageous section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning combination E1 having the number "250" is referred to as "small winning combination E1a", and the small winning combination E1 having the number "750" is referred to as "small winning combination E1b".
Further, the small winning combination E2, 1BBA and the small winning combination E2 were deleted.
By doing so, in the game in which the small winning combination 36 wins, the game always shifts from the next game to the advantageous section (by then, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up).

Further, the advantageous section when the small winning combination E1b is won can be ended only by executing the instruction function operating game once (for example, the instruction function operating game is executed once and then ended in 5 games). is there. Such an advantageous section may also be referred to as an AT gasse precursor among the AT precursors.
On the other hand, the advantageous section when the small winning combination E1a is won is the advantageous section in which the AT is executed after the AT precursor, and the number of games is after the AT precursor (By the way, the AT precursor is the instruction function operating game once. (Ends in 5 games after execution) 50 games are set. The count of the 50 games may be started immediately after the AT precursor, when the game shifts to RT3 (or the next game), or when the replay group B is won (or the next game). It may be started at, or it may be started by staying at RT3 (or its next game). Further, in the 50 games, when the conditional device (small winning combination B group, small winning combination C group, replay B group, or replay C group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, in principle, the instruction function operating game is executed.

Further, it has a small winning combination E1 (number of positions "250") that shifts to the advantageous section, a small winning combination E1 (number of positions "750") that does not shift to the advantageous section, and a small winning combination E2 that does not shift to the advantageous section. , When the small winning combination E1 (number of positions "250") that shifts to the advantageous section is won, when shifting to the advantageous section where the AT of 50 games can be executed, from the game in which the small winning combination 36 wins or the next game thereof. , It is meaningless to output a continuous production to arouse the expectation of the player as in the past. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by looking at whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. The eleventh embodiment is conceived in order to output a continuous effect for inspiring a player's expectation as in the conventional case.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing advantageous sections and the like at the time of winning the small winning combination E1b (Example 1) and the small winning combination E1a (Example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1b is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up). Then, wait until the small role B group is won. After the start of the advantageous section, in the game in which the first small winning combination B is won, the instruction function is activated and the advantageous push order is displayed (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of this instruction function operation game, a continuous effect is output (even during the continuous effect, AT is in the omen). Of course, a continuous effect may be output from the instruction function operating game. In this example, the continuous production executes five games. Then, in the fifth game, an effect of whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues after that is output. When the small role E1b is won, the advantageous section (AT precursor) can be ended in one instruction function operation game, so the advantageous section (AT precursor) is ended in the game in which the continuous production is completed, and the normal section is entered. ..
In addition, when the small winning combination B group is further won between the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but in the present embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED77 is turned on), and the instruction function operating game is executed in the game in which the first small winning combination B group is won. The continuous production (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when the small role E1b is won). Then, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the fifth game of the continuous production is output, which means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued thereafter. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the continuous production is completed.
When the small winning combination B group is further won between the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operating game is not executed as in the case of winning the small winning combination E1b. Of course, if the instruction function operating game is to be executed between the five games during the continuous production after winning the small role E1b, and when the small role B group is won, after winning the small role E1a. It is preferable that the instruction function operating game is executed even when the small winning combination B group is won between the five games during the continuous production of. This is done when the small winning combination E1b is won and when the small winning combination E1a is won, and when the instruction function operation game is executed / not executed during the continuous production, it is different. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) after that.

Here, when the small role E1a is won, it is stipulated that the AT of 50 games is executed. Instead of this, the advantageous section (AT without AT precursor) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (the next game when the small winning combination E1a is won). Alternatively, after the transition to the advantageous section, 50 games may be counted with the first instruction function operating game as the first game (AT precursors up to the previous game of this game, and AT is started from this game).
Further, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game won in the winning combination (replay B group including the replay 02) that can be transferred to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22). When 50 games are set from the next game that wins the replay that can be transferred to a specific RT, the game that wins the replay group B notifies the push order for shifting to the specific RT. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game that won the replay B group (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from taking a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

Furthermore, in the specification that the advantageous section starts from the next game of the game that won the small role E1a, if the small role E1a is won while staying at a specific RT, another from the specific RT. Notification for maintaining a specific RT when a winning combination (pattern symbol 01 to 03 or a winning combination that can display replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) is won. May be done. Then, the AT count may be started from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed, or the predetermined game (the next game may be used) after the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed. ) May be used. By setting in this way, the number of games to be transferred to a specific RT after being transferred to another RT can be reduced, which is advantageous up to the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). You can increase the chances of giving a game.

In the above example, in both the small winning combination E1a and the small winning combination E1b, the continuous production is set to 5 games, but the continuous production is not limited to this, and the first instruction function operating game or the next game thereof is an AT of 50 games. It may be a game (1 game) that outputs an effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1b (number of positions "750") is won, the advantageous section (AT after the sign of AT) is set to execute the AT of 50 games after the AT sign, and when the small winning combination E1a (number of positions "250") is won, It may be an advantageous section (AT precursor) that can be completed by the instruction function operation game of the times.

Further, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the number of AT games "m" is determined, and when the small winning combination E1a and the small winning combination E1b are won, the number of games "n" until the first instruction function operating game can be executed is determined. It will be decided by lottery. Then, when the number of games "n" is determined, the instruction function is not activated even when the small winning combination B group is won until the number of games "n" has elapsed. After the number of games "n" has elapsed, the instruction function operating game is executed in the game when the first small winning combination B group is won.
Further, when the determined number of games "n" is, for example, "n1" and "n2" (n1 <n2), and the number of AT games determined at the time of winning the small winning combination E1a is "m1". Is easy to determine "n1", and when the determined number of AT games is "m2", which is larger than "m1", "n2" may be easily determined. Further, "n1" may be easily determined even when the small winning combination E1b is won. Further, when the small winning combination E1a is won, "n1" may be more easily determined when the small winning combination E1b is won than when the determined number of AT games is "m1".
In this way, the longer the number of games "n" from the transition to the advantageous section to the execution of the first instruction function operating game, the higher the possibility that the number of games of a larger AT is determined. You can expect it. Of course, the shorter the number of games "n" until the first instruction function operating game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of games of a larger AT has been determined may be increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, the continuous production is output from the next game at the time of winning the first small role B group. The reason for doing this is that, as in the past, the continuous effect is simply output from the next game of the game that won the small role E1a or the small role E1b (the continuous effect executes 5 games). , The advantageous section (AT) when the small role E1a is won may be such that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends in 5 games) ends in 50 games. Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning E1b is to be completed in 5 games, if the instruction function operating game is not executed even once during the 5 games, it is the 5th game of continuous production. After that, even though the effect indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is not continued is output, there is a possibility that an inconvenience such as the advantageous section (AT precursor) not ending may occur.

Further, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when the small winning combination E1b is won is to be terminated by one instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the fifth game of continuous production. Therefore, there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of the continuous production, and the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production. Because there is. Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when the small role E1b is won ends in 5 games after one execution of the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous production. This is because there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production because it is not always performed.

However, in the advantageous section (AT) when the small role E1a is won, it is assumed that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends with one execution of the instruction function operating game) ends in 50 games. If the advantageous section (AT precursor) when the small role E1b is won is to be terminated by one instruction function operation game, the continuous production is started from the game that started the advantageous section regardless of which one is won. , The continuous production is continued until the first small role B group is won, and when the first small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated, and in the game or the next game, the advantageous section (AT) is continued. ) May be notified.
In this case, since the number of games until the first small role B group is won is indefinite, the production image meaning that the continuous production used in the continuous production is continued and the advantageous section An effect image meaning that (AT) is not continued and an effect image meaning that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared and a continuous effect may be output.
In addition, when the small role E1a (small role E1b is also possible) is won during the advantageous section (AT omen) based on winning the small role E1b (for example, during continuous production), the AT of 50 games after the AT omen May be changed to execute (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Examples 3 and 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first small role B group is won, and the continuous effect is output from the next game when the small role B group is won.
On the other hand, in Example 3 of FIG. 69, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous production is not output until the first small role B group is won, and from the next game when the small role B group is won. This is an example in which the continuous effect is not output, and when the small winning combination E1 is won, the advantageous section that ends when the AT of 30 games is executed is started from the next game. Of course, the end condition of the advantageous section in Example 3 is not limited to this, and AT of 30 games (the number of games is free) is executed after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor may end in 5 games). In addition, the end conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied. Of course, the advantageous section with different end conditions may be started when the small winning combination E1a is won and when the small winning combination E1b is won.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there may be a time when the advantageous section is started and a time when the advantageous section is not started. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous section, the player never wins the small winning combination B group until the end condition of the initially set advantageous section (for example, executing AT of 30 games) is reached. This is an example. If the small winning combination B group is won before the end condition of the advantageous section is reached and the instruction function operating game is executed, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. 69, the advantageous section When the end condition is reached (when the AT of 30 games is executed), the advantageous section is ended.

On the other hand, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached and the instruction function operating game has not been executed even once (for example, when the small winning combination B group has never been won), then the small winning combination B At least the advantageous section will be extended until the group is elected and the instruction function operating game is executed. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, an example is shown in which the advantageous section is extended, then the instruction function operating game is executed (by winning the small winning combination B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. In Example 3, the advantageous section ends in less than 1500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in Example 4 of FIG. 69, after the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operating game is not executed even once (without winning the small winning combination B group even once), and the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500. This is an example of reaching a game. In other words, the end condition of the advantageous section was reached, but when the upper limit was reached because the advantageous section was extended, or there was an addition during the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section was not reached and the upper limit was reached. This is an example when it arrives.
In a rare case such as Example 4, unlike the case of Example 3, the advantageous section ends when the upper limit is reached, even if the instruction function operating game is not executed even once. This prioritizes "terminating the advantageous section when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached" rather than "performing at least one instruction function operating game during the advantageous section". To do. This is because, as in Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if a rare role such as a small role E1 is won during that time, the advantageous section can be used. It is possible to add, etc. (of course, it is not necessary), but as in Example 4, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, depending on the rare role won during that time. , Because it is not possible to add an advantageous section, etc., the normal section is more advantageous for the player (if a rare role is won during the normal section, a new advantageous section will start. Because there is).

<12th Embodiment>
The twelfth embodiment is when the game continues up to 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section (for example, when a small winning combination E1 or the like is won, an addition is performed during the started advantageous section, and the continuation is confirmed. Or, when it is confirmed that the game will be continued due to the 1BB game being performed during the advantageous section, for example, the ending effect is output from the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached). It is a feature (the point of outputting the ending effect is the same as in Example 3 of FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). The game is not limited to the 1450 game, and various settings such as the 1400 game, the 1470 game, and the like can be set.
Then, the ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the "ending effect" is, for example, a moving image, also called a movie image, which is not divided for each game (a moving image in which the time is set in advance, not switching the image for each unit game). ..

By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays the game at the shortest, it can be seen to the end in exactly 50 games (games in which the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning or displays the last image as a still image. As described above, it is preferable that the ending effect is set to a length that allows the player to see the game to the end by the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays the game in the shortest time. At the end of the ending production (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals won in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals won and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) are displayed. indicate. Of course, the total number of medals won in the advantageous section (total number of medals won), the difference between the total number of medals won and the total number of medals inserted (total number of medals won), and the total number of games (1500 games) are the ending effects. It may be displayed as another effect output after that (such as an effect output during a freeze executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)) instead of as the end of. ..

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game, the ending effect is ended at the 1500th game, and the advantageous section is ended in the advantageous section.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. of the first embodiment) is won in the middle of an advantageous section and a 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450th game in the advantageous section has not been reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450th game, and the ending effect is ended at the 1500th game (the ending effect ends at the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, in FIG. 70, (b) shows an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, then the 1BB is won in the 1490th game, and the 1BB game is executed. Then, an example is shown in which the end of the 1BB game exceeds the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended with 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). By the way, even when the advantageous section is finished, the freeze is not executed. Therefore, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the end of the advantageous section (which is a normal section).

In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). This is because, as in (a), when the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is reached when not playing 1BB, it is advantageous in the effect output at the end of the ending effect or during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section. It is necessary to display the total number of games played in the section, the total number of acquired cards, etc. (in particular, the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of acquired cards during AT, etc.). On the other hand, as in (b), when the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, the 1BB game is executed after that (it is a normal section), and the ending effect ends at this point. In this way, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the advantageous section, and in the effect output during the freeze, displaying the total number of games played and the total number of acquired cards in the advantageous section is 1BB. This is not preferable because it interferes with the game.

In the first place, when the 1BB game is finished, the freeze is executed at the end of the production during the 1BB game or at the end of the 1BB game, and in the production output during the freeze, the total number of games and the total number of games during the 1BB game. Since the number of acquired cards is displayed, in the case of (b), even when the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not finished at this point, and when the 1BB game is finished, The ending effect is finished, and the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the 1BB game. In the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section, etc. (especially) , The number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of acquired cards during AT, etc.) seems to be preferable.

Further, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, strictly speaking, the total number of games played in the advantageous section, the total number of acquired games, etc. (particularly, the game was executed in the advantageous section). If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games during AT, the total number of games acquired during AT, etc., it is better not to include the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during that period (normal section and during 1BB games). However, if it is not particular about displaying strictly, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games during that period (during a normal section and 1BB game) may be included in the display. The player is more satisfied when the display is included. For example, the advantageous section can only be executed up to 1500 games, but on the display, it exceeds 1500 games, so there is a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when the total number of games and the total number of acquisitions during the 1BB game are displayed together with the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of acquisitions during the advantageous section, etc. (particularly, the advantageous section). When the number of AT sets executed in, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of games acquired during AT, etc.) is displayed, the display is during 1BB games after reaching the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. Will continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (Example 3) described above, at the time of output of the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games during the 1BB game, the total number of games and the total number of acquired cards in the advantageous section, etc. (particularly, When the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of games acquired during AT, etc.) is not displayed, those are during 1BB games after reaching the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays the shortest game, the player can watch the game until the end of the advantageous section (when the game reaches the end, after that). (Repeat from the beginning or display the last image as a still image), but when the ending effect is output even after the advantageous section ends as in the example of (b), the ending effect is repeated from the beginning or The last image of the ending effect may be continuously displayed as a still image.
The ending effect is not to switch the image for each unit game (separate for each game), but for a moving image with a predetermined time, a moving image for dividing each predetermined number of games, or a still image that is not divided for each game. It may be any of a still image or the like that is divided into a predetermined number of games.

<13th Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT transition as in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) The winning probabilities of the condition devices (replay B group, replay C group, small winning combination B group) related to the RT transition are set so as not to have a setting difference.
(2) In RT2 that has transitioned from non-RT or RT1, an advantageous section is added (possible) based on winning the replay B group. On the other hand, in the case of shifting from RT3 to RT2, when shifting from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of Replay A is set to have a difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small winning combination D is set to have a difference.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a number table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device of "small winning combination D" is provided in FIG. 17, but in this embodiment, since the small winning combination D has a setting difference, the small winning combination D is set in the table (2). ). Also in the thirteenth embodiment, the same number table (1) as in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (there is no number of small winning combination D).

Similar to the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small winning combination B group and display the pattern symbol. Here, in order to display the pattern symbol, it is necessary to win the small winning combination B group. Then, when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group, the ease of transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 differs depending on the set value (the ease of transition from RT3 to RT2 also differs). ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probability of the small winning combination B group is set so as not to have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, each position of the small winning combination B1 to the small winning combination B12 is set to "770" (not limited to this value), which is common to all the settings. In order to make the appearance rates of the small combinations B1 to B12 the same, the small combinations B1 to B12 are all set to the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay group B is drawn only at RT2, and the number of replays B1 to B3 is "2800", which is common to all settings. Further, the replay C group is drawn only at RT3, and the number of replays C1 to C3 is "12000" common to all settings. These points are the same as those in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT or RT2 shifted from RT1, the addition of the advantageous section is executed when the replay B group is won (may be when the replay 02 is displayed or when the transition from RT2 to RT3 is performed). In addition, the addition of the advantageous section may always be added, or whether or not to add may be decided by lottery. Further, the number of additional games may be a predetermined number of games, and the number of games may be determined by lottery.

In addition, "addition of advantageous section" can be replaced with "addition of AT" in all embodiments. For example, when a special role is won during AT (for example, the number of remaining games of AT is "5"), and when the replay group B is won in non-RT after the special game is completed or RT2 shifted from RT1. An additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining games of the AT is executed, and when this lottery is won, the number of remaining games of the AT can be increased (for example, the number of remaining games of the AT game is set to "25").

It should be noted that, in RT2 that has transitioned from non-RT or RT1, executing the addition of the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay B group is similar to the tenth embodiment described above.
In the thirteenth embodiment, since the replay group B is a conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability (placement number), it is possible to carry out the addition of the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device. As a result, it is possible to prevent the probability of addition from having a setting difference.
Further, as in the tenth embodiment, when the transition from RT3 to RT2 is performed, even if the replay B group is won in the RT2 (even if the replay 02 is displayed or the transition from RT2 to RT3). , Do not add the advantageous section.
Further, in RT2, when the replay group B is won, RT2 is maintained or RT3 is transferred. Therefore, the replay group B is a conditional device capable of shifting the RT. Since the replay group B is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting difference in the probability of transition from RT2 to RT3 (easiness of transition).

In RT3, when the replay C group is elected, RT3 is maintained or RT2 is transferred. Therefore, the replay group C is a condition device capable of shifting the RT. Since the replay C group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the replay C group from having a setting difference in the probability of transition from RT3 to RT2 (easiness of transition).

Similarly, when the small winning combination B group is won in non-RT, RT1 or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, the process shifts to RT2. Therefore, the small winning combination B group is a conditional device capable of shifting the RT. Since the small winning combination B group is a conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability, the probability of transitioning from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2 (easiness of transition) should not have a setting difference. can do.
Since the small winning combination C group does not correspond to the condition device capable of shifting the RT, it may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not having a setting difference in the winning probability of the condition device (condition device related to RT transition) in which RT can be transferred. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) that shifts based on the winning of a special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of "1BBA + small winning combination E2", 1BBB, and "1BBBB + small winning combination D" have setting differences, but RT4 (internal middle) shifts due to the carryover of the winning of the special winning combination. ) Is an exception (may be affected by the setting difference). This is because RT4 (inside) shifts based on the winning of a special role, and does not shift depending on the push order of the player, so that the properties are different from those described above. Furthermore, since RT4 (inside the inside) is intended to stay only for a short period of time until 1BB is won, the properties are different from those described above. Further, RT4 (inside the inside) cannot determine the transition to the advantageous section even during the normal section, and cannot add or the like even during the advantageous section, so that the RT4 (inside the inside) cannot be added to the advantageous section. This is because there is no difference in setting between the probability of transition and the probability of addition.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning probability (number of places) of the replay A. In Replay A, the winning probability (number of places) is different for each RT. Since RT does not shift when Replay A is won, the RT transition rate will not be affected even if a setting difference is provided. In this way, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the probability of replaying. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including the replay, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the payout rate. It gets higher.
Then, in the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of the replay A is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, since the non-winning probability (probability of losing) can be made lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, the ball output rate can be increased accordingly.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number "250") that shifts to the advantageous section when winning in the normal section and the winning in the normal section are won. Also provided a small winning combination E1 (number of positions "750") that does not shift to the advantageous section. If the small winning combination E1 with the number "250" is won, the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed (the count of 50 games may be started immediately, or when the game shifts to RT3 (or the next game). ), When the replay group B is won (or the next game), or when staying at RT3 (or the next game). It is assumed that the transition is made (in addition, the above-mentioned various advantageous section termination conditions may be applied). Even if the AT has the same 50 games, a higher probability of winning Replay A (low probability of non-winning) will result in a new medal being inserted than when the probability of winning Replay A is low (higher non-winning probability). Since there is no need to (consume), the payout rate will increase accordingly. In this way, even if there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to make a setting difference in the ball output rate in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the small winning combination D is a conditional device having no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition device has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the number of payouts when the small winning combination D is won and the small winning combination 35 (watermelon) wins is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small winning combination D is the small winning combination having the maximum number of payouts among the small winning combination.

Further, since the small winning combination 35 related to the small winning combination D is "PB ≠ 1", the small winning combination 35 cannot be won unless it is pressed. Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination D is won, a green notification may be output to indicate that the small winning combination D has been won. Here, when the winning combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won in the conditional device, it is not "the operation of the instruction function" to output the effect suggesting the winning. It is true that there are cases where the small role 35 wins and cases where the small role 35 does not win at the timing of the push, but the small role 35 is correct regardless of whether the small role D is won or not. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a role that can always win a prize. In this respect, it is different from the small winning combination B, in which the winning rate differs depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated, as in the small winning combination B group of the present invention. For example, if the operation is always left first in order to win the small winning combination 01 when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 cannot be won when the small winning combination B5 is won.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" No. 4, 9, or 14 in FIG. 5 can stop at the effective line, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 8th or 13th "watermelon" can stop at the effective line (on the right reel 31, "watermelon" is "PB = 1", so any timing is acceptable). At any time (without any notice), the small winning combination 35 can be won.
In the present invention, there is no combination of "PB ≠ 1" other than the small combination 35 (excluding the case where the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won), so each game is stopped at the above timing. If the switch 42 is operated, the small winning combination 35 will not be missed.
From the above, the game at the time of winning the small winning combination D does not correspond to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention.

As a result, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the instruction function at least once during the advantageous section when the condition device, which is the maximum payout by the operation of the instruction function, is won. The "conditional device that becomes the maximum payout by the method" is not the small winning combination D but the small winning combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small combination E1 (two payouts) is provided as a condition device having no setting difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small win D: There is a setting difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small role B group: There is no setting difference (when the push order is correct, the number of payouts is 9)
Winning probability of small role E1: No setting difference (2 payouts)
And the size relationship of the number of payouts is
Small role D> Small role B group (when the push order is correct)> Small role E1
Will be.

If the game at the time of winning the small winning combination D corresponds to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention (the small winning combination has a different winning rate depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated). In the case), the "conditional device that maximizes the payout by the operation of the instruction function" is not the small winning combination B group but the small winning combination D. In that case, since the probability of winning the small winning combination D is low, it is likely that the small winning combination D has not been won by the time the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (the advantage section cannot be ended even though it is desired to end). However, if the winning probability of the small role D is increased (if it is higher than the winning probability of the small role B group), there is a high possibility that the small role D is duplicated with 1BBB (rare role). (Because most of the single wins of the small role D cannot be expected to be duplicated with 1BBB).

For this reason, the number of payouts when the small win D wins must be less than the number of payouts when the push order of the small win B group is correct. Then, even if the winning probability of the small winning combination D has a setting difference, the payout rate does not change significantly (because the small winning combination with a large number of payouts has a setting difference, the payout rate changes significantly. Because it will be done). However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group, which has a large number of payouts when the push order is correct, then there will be a setting difference in the ease of RT transition.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the small winning combination D with a large number of payouts is used, and the payout rate differs depending on the set value (the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate (the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate). It can be set to change)), and the RT transition can be prevented from being affected by the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small winning combination D is "PB ≠ 1", but for example, if "watermelon" is arranged as "PB = 1" for all reels 31, regardless of the push (player's). You will be able to win prizes (regardless of skill).
Further, as shown in FIG. 71, since the small winning combination D may be elected in duplicate with 1BBB, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the small winning combination 35 to appear, and when the small winning combination 35 appears, the winning of 1BBB is expected. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to "1", the probability that 1BBB is won at the time of the appearance of the small winning combination 35 is "20/520" = "0.038 (about 3.8%). ) ”, And when the set value is set to“ 6 ”, the probability that 1BBB will be won at the time of the appearance of the small winning combination 35 is“ 25/625 ”=“ 0.040 (about 4.0%). ) ”. Therefore, when the small winning combination 35 appears, the higher the set value, the higher the possibility that 1BBB has been won. Therefore, the player is provided with an element for estimating the set value, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is increased. You can also.

As can be said for all embodiments, in FIGS. 17, 18, and 71, the portion marked with "○" can be freely changed to "x" and is marked with "x". It is free to set the place to "○" unless the condition device has no setting difference and the player wins only at a specific RT (except during RT4, 1BBA game, 1BBB game), and "x". It is free to change the part marked with "Δ" as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

<14th Embodiment>
In the 14th embodiment, when the condition for changing the end condition of the advantageous section (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied after starting the advantageous section and before the end of the advantageous section (before reaching the end condition). Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, when the number of games (initial value) of the advantageous section is 30 at the start of the advantageous section (for example, the previous game was the winning of the small winning combination D in the first embodiment), it is advantageous during the advantageous section. When the section extension condition (for example, winning of the small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the 14th embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but other various end conditions of the advantageous section described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart illustrating the 14th embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operating game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small winning combination B group. Then, in Example 1, the number of games in the initially set advantageous section is set to 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the number of games is added by "50" during the 30 games. If the extension condition is not satisfied during the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games played in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

In this case, if the instruction function operating game is executed at least once at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the small winning combination B group is never won, that is, 1 It is possible to end the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game many times. This is because a total of 80 games are executed once for the instruction function operation game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the number of games in the advantageous section initially set is 30 games, and the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 30 games, and 50 games are extended. An example is shown.
Then, in Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (total 80 games), the small winning combination B group was never won (that is, the instruction function operating game was not executed even once). This is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (80 games are reached), the advantageous section is not ended.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when the small winning combination B group is won between the extended 50 games and the instruction function operating game is executed (two-dot chain line A in the figure), the advantageous section is obtained in the extended 50 games. Can be terminated (two-dot chain line B in the figure).
On the other hand, when the total of 80 games, that is, the instruction function operating game has not been executed even once from the start of the advantageous section, wait for the small winning combination B group to be won, and when the small winning combination B group is won, the instruction function is activated. Play the game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games played in the first advantageous section was set to 30 games, and the number of extended games was set to 50 games. If the transition conditions are not met, 32 games (the number of games is free), or one (the number of games is free) instruction function operation game, etc.), AT precursors (for example, the conditions for transition to AT) Even if it is not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free), 50 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of counting the number of games may be the various timings described above), etc.) , CZ (for example, if the transition condition to AT is not satisfied, the game ends in 10 games (the number of games is free), or the game ends in one instruction function operation game (the number of games is free). Compared to the precursors, it is easier to meet the transition conditions to AT), AT (if the extension conditions are not met, 30 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of counting the number of games is also the start timing of the above-mentioned various timings) It can be provided in various ways, such as those ending with (good).

For example, at the start of the advantageous section, the game shifts to CZ (corresponding to "30" game in FIG. 72), and when the transition condition to AT (corresponding to "extension condition") is satisfied during this CZ, AT (corresponding to "50") It is possible to shift to (corresponding to the extension of the game) (extend the end condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, when the transition condition to AT is not satisfied during CZ, the advantageous section is terminated when the end condition of CZ is satisfied, and the transition to the normal section (normal for CZ, AT, etc.) is performed (eg). 1 out of 2 points chain line) can be mentioned.

Furthermore, in addition to the above
(1) The first advantageous section is a CZ (for example, one that ends in 30 games), and when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, a CZ with a longer number of games (the number of games is added by "20"). ).
(2) The first advantageous section is set as "advantageous section ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of the instruction function operation game (Gase AT precursor or CZ)", and the advantageous section before the first instruction function operation game is executed. When the extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of small winning combination E1) is satisfied, CZ (predetermined number of games or instruction function operating game ends in a predetermined number of times), Or change to AT (one that ends after the specified number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is set as "advantageous section ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of the instruction function operation game (Gase AT precursor or CZ)", and the advantageous section before the first instruction function operation game is executed. When the extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) of is satisfied, "advantageous section (Gase AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a plurality of (for example, 3 times) instruction function operation game more than a predetermined number of times". Change to.
(4) The first advantageous section is set to the AT of 30 games, and when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to the AT of 100 games (the number of games is added by "70").
That can be mentioned.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games of the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function operating game is executed only when the first small winning combination B group is won, and then (30 games from the first game) is the small winning combination B group. It is not necessary to execute the instruction function operation game even if the player wins the game.
On the other hand, during the CZ (between 30 games), the instruction function operating game may be executed two or more times.
Further, even when the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, if the instruction function operation game has already been executed once during CZ, the instruction function operation game is not executed in the subsequent AT. You may. In addition, the same applies when the conditions for transition to CZ or AT are satisfied during the precursor of Gase AT. That is, it is sufficient to execute one instruction function operating game between the start and the end of the advantageous section.

<15th Embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized in that it has a case where the freeze is executed and a case where the freeze is not executed at the end of the advantageous section.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and the freeze in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the advantageous section (for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won), CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. Then, when the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, AT is started after the end of CZ. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some may start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, while others may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, the first CZ (advantageous section) does not satisfy the transition condition to AT, and the advantageous section ends only with CZ. The next CZ (advantageous section) is an example in which the transition condition to AT is satisfied, AT is executed after the end of CZ, and the AT and the advantageous section are ended. When the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, the CZ may be terminated immediately and the AT may be executed, or the AT may be executed after waiting until the CZ is completed (this means that the fifteenth). Not limited to embodiments).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even when the game ends only in CZ, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once because the section has shifted to the advantageous section.
In the fifteenth embodiment, at the end of the first CZ (when the AT is not executed after the end of the CZ and the advantageous section is ended), the freeze is not executed (two-dot chain line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantageous section).
At the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games and the total number of acquired ATs are displayed as images. Of course, an image including the total number of games played and the total number of acquired cards in CZ may be displayed, and when shifting from CZ to AT via AT precursor, it is in CZ and / or in AT precursor. An image may be displayed including the total number of games played and the total number of acquired cards.

In this way, it is determined in advance in what advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end and in what advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end.
For example, as expected values such as the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of acquired cards, the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only by CZ (may be a precursor of Gase AT)) and the expected value than the first end condition. When there is a second end condition (for example, when AT is executed after CZ or when only AT is executed), when the advantageous section ends with the first end condition, the freeze is not executed and the advantageous section is not executed. Is executed under the second termination condition. This is because the freeze is executed until the expected value such as the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section is small (for example, the total number of games is 10 games and the total number of acquired cards is 12). This is because there is a high possibility that the player's disappointment will be increased (the interest will be reduced) if the total number of acquired sheets is displayed as an image.
Even if it is an advantageous section, unlike AT, there are some that do not aim to give a lot of medals to the player (the total number of acquired cards increases) such as Gase AT precursor, AT precursor, CZ. , It is not preferable to uniformly freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

As a determination of whether or not to execute freeze, for example, setting a freeze flag can be mentioned. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but is turned on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on, and when it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. Immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on, and if it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag is displayed. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, it is possible to prevent the freeze from being executed at the end of the advantageous section, which does not bring much merit to the player, such as when the advantageous section is started but ends only with the CZ.
In addition, information that identifies the type of advantageous section (CZ, Gase AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.) ("1" to "4", etc., or "0" to "4" including the normal section, etc. For example, "0" is a normal section, "1" is a CZ, "2" is a gasse AT precursor, "3" is an AT precursor, "4" is an AT, etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the end of the advantageous section, this information may be determined and freeze may be executed.

Also, the freeze is not limited to one time. For example, if the AT executes 50 games as one break, it executes a freeze every 50 games (for example, even if it is an AT of 100 games), and during the execution of the freeze, the AT continues after the next game. It is possible to output an effect of whether or not to do it. Further, for each 50 games, the total number of games played and the total number of acquired games at that time can be displayed as an image, and an effect as if the advantageous section ends (it was an AT of 50 games) can be output.

In addition, when the upper limit of 1500 games of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of AT, the freeze is executed, and the total number of games and the total number of acquired games during the AT are displayed as an image during the freeze. ..
Also in this case, when CZ or AT precursor is executed before AT is executed, even if the image including the total number of games played and the total number of acquired cards during CZ and / or AT precursor is displayed. Good.
In addition, even when the upper limit of 1500 games of the advantageous section is reached while executing the CZ or AT precursor, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, a part of the advantageous section (a part of the advantageous section such as CZ) is executed. Or all), the total number of games played, the total number of acquired games, and the like may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached during 1BB operation (for example, 1BB operates during AT execution and 1BB is operating). When 1500 games are reached, the freeze is not executed when 1500 games are reached (because 1BB games are in progress), and freezes are executed at the end of 1BB games (at least the total number of games during AT during the freeze). The total number of acquired sheets is displayed as an image.)
When the freeze is executed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the freeze is completed. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off before the freeze is executed, or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off during the freeze execution. The initialization timing is the same as the extinguishing timing of the advantageous section display LED 77.

Further, in FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends only by CZ and a condition device in which it is confirmed that both CZ and AT are executed. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 of the number "750" is won alone, it is set as an advantageous section ending only with CZ, and when the small winning combination E1 of the number "250" is won alone, CZ and AT It can be mentioned as an advantageous section for executing. With this setting, it is possible to decide to execute the AT without performing a lottery as to whether or not the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be performed during CZ to see if the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied (may be performed only in the advantageous section ending only in CZ). It is also possible to output a continuous effect of whether or not to execute AT before several games when CZ ends. Then, in this case as well, whether or not to execute the freeze is as described above.

Although the third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board is not limited to this. Reference numeral 50 denotes a parameter (number of digestion games, number of remaining games, number of additions, number of acquisitions, number of times of instruction function operation, etc.) required for display during the advantageous section (AT) on the sub-control board 80 side. ..

(2) Further, in FIGS. 43 to 52, in order to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games, parameters related to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) are transmitted. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the number of acquired cards (for example, 3000 cards), information on each game and the number of acquired cards is transmitted.
Further, each game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that the advantageous section is in progress and information indicating that the AT is in progress, and counts the number of games in the advantageous section and AT on the sub control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, lottery tables A and B are provided as lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery is used depending on whether or not the specified number is "1000" or more as the threshold value. I switched the table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of types of lottery tables may be provided. Moreover, although the specified number "1000" is illustrated as a threshold value, it is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different sizes of expected values to be added. Then, when the specified number (AT game count) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used, when the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used, and when the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300. Can use the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, it is peculiar when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit. Information is displayed, but is not limited to these Examples 1 to 3.
a) A display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) A display different from the display before the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit. It does not have to be limited to the display contents of Examples 1 to 3.

(5) Further, in Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of AT games exceeds 1500 due to the addition, the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed. The information itself of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed, such as different display fonts for the number of remaining games, different character sizes, different display colors, etc., but it can be added by changing the display mode. This may inform the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1500 games.

(6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantageous section (AT) is running low, a display such as "It will end in 10 more games" is displayed, but at the start of the advantageous section (AT). , "This advantageous section (AT) cannot be played beyond 1500 games", etc., can be notified in advance.

(7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2, but for example, when the slot machine has specifications in which the advantageous section and the AT do not match, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, using two external signals, it is possible to transmit an external signal that can distinguish "non-advantageous section (non-AT)", "advantageous section and non-AT", and "advantageous section and AT".

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won immediately before the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, and the start time of the BB game is when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (the 1500th game from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after the upper limit is reached (for example, advantageous). When it is the 1501st game from the start of the section, the BB game in the non-advantageous section is started, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantageous section and AT). To end).
If the end of the BB game is when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (the 1500th game from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately before the upper limit is reached (for example, the 1499th game from the start of the advantageous section), the outside at the end of the BB game. At the same time that the signal 1 (BB) is turned off, the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (the advantageous section and the AT are ended).

(9) In the fifth embodiment, AT, CZ, precursors, and normal are exemplified as the control states controlled by the main control board 50. For example, an additional special zone that shifts when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide. This additional special zone is continued until, for example, the predetermined number of games is exhausted or the predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times, and during that period, each time the condition device (for example, small combination B group) to be added is won. , The number of AT games can be added.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in the example of (a) in FIG. 61, after the end of AT (state 1), the AT (state 1) is shifted to the AT pullback period (state 2), and the AT cannot be pulled back in this state 2. Has transitioned to normal (state 3). Further, in the example of (b), after the end of AT, the shift was made to CZ, and when the AT could not be pulled back in this CZ, the shift was made to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of CZ, the process was shifted to the CZ pullback period, and when the CZ could not be pulled back during this CZ pullback period, the shift was normal.
However, the above state transition is an example and is not limited to this.

For example, in FIG. 61 (a), after the end of AT (state 1), the transition to normal (state 3) may be performed without going through the AT pullback period (state 2).
Further, in FIG. 61 (b), the transition may be made from normal → CZ → AT, or may be shifted from normal → precursor → AT. After the end of AT, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or from AT to precursor (CZ pullback period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), the transition from normal to CZ may be performed without going through a precursor. Further, it may be transferred from CZ to normal without going through the pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the output of the continuous effect is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game, and the AT is continuously operated during the 1BBA game. You may continue to output an effect that encourages whether or not to start.
Further, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally notifying whether or not to start the AT may be output until the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of the AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output during the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous production is not always a necessary production. Therefore, it is arbitrary whether or not to output the continuous effect. Further, for example, it is possible to output only one game as an effect of whether or not to continue the advantageous section.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, it is conceivable that the instruction function is activated when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, when the small combination B group is elected in RT4 (internal middle). .. When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the ball output rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from (at the start of RT4, which is the next game of the game in which the special role is won).
On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated even after shifting to RT4, the advantageous section may be started by the start of the special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, the design is made so that the winning probability of the AT additional lottery on the main control board 50 is low, or the additional effect on the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing so, even if the upper limit of the advantageous section approaches, it is possible to play the game without discouraging the player as much as possible.
As another method, there is also a method of not discouraging the player as much as possible by changing the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of execution games of the advantageous section and the like. For example, in FIG. 17, when a small winning combination E1 with a number of "250" is won, the number of additional games is set to "50" (50%), "100" (40%), or "200" (10%). Set so that the more the number of additional games, the higher the possibility that the freeze effect will be executed.

In such a specification, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300) and "200" is determined as the number of additional games, the freeze effect is performed with a probability X (including 100%). When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X when "200" is determined as the number of additional games.
With this configuration, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be lowered, and the player can be prevented from being excessively agitated by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to being implemented alone, and a plurality of embodiments can be combined and implemented as appropriate.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 26, which solve the problems to be solved by each initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means for this and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 26.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. In such a case, it is required to perform appropriate control.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the player from giving the impression that the player can play the game beyond the upper limit when the instruction game section (AT) exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section. is there.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; Example 2 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) that controls the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that outputs an effect related to the instruction game section.
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantage section is terminated.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (adding the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended.
Information about the indicated game section (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control means.
The effect control means
If the extension of the designated game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section based on the information received from the game control means, the predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section (AT remaining game after addition). (Number of times) is displayed,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the instruction game section is extended to exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the instruction game section is extended. When it is decided, it is characterized by displaying specific information (“celebration”, “congratulations”, etc.) different from the predetermined information.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
The effect control means
As the predetermined information, information that can grasp how much the indicated game section has been extended is displayed (displays the specific number of games), and the information is displayed.
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision has been made regarding the extension of the designated game section, but it is not possible to grasp the degree of extension of the designated game section (displaying the specific number of games). do not)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the original invention, when the instruction game section is extended to exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the instruction game section When the extension is decided, the predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding if the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; Example 3 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) that controls the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that outputs an effect related to the instruction game section.
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantage section is terminated.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (adding the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended.
Information about the indicated game section (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control means.
When the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value (the total number of AT games is 1500 games), the directed game section becomes the advantageous section based on the information received from the game control means. The feature is that it is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that suggests that the upper limit of the continuation of is approaching.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, since an effect suggesting that the indicated game section is approaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is output, the indicated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. You can tell the player not to do so.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; Example 1 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) that controls the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that outputs an effect related to the instruction game section.
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantage section is terminated.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, when the conditions for extending the designated game section are satisfied, the designated game section can be extended.
Information about the indicated game section (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control means.
The effect control means
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the extension of the designated game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the instruction game section is extended to exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the instruction game section is extended. When it is decided, the information regarding the extension of the indicated game section (the number of remaining AT games after the addition) is not displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the original invention, when the instruction game section is extended to exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the instruction game section When the extension is decided, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; Example 4 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) that controls the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that outputs an effect related to the instruction game section.
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantage section is terminated.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, when the conditions for extending the designated game section are satisfied, the designated game section can be extended.
Information about the indicated game section (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control means.
The effect control means is characterized in that it displays game information (such as "it will end in 10 more games") indicating that the instruction game section is not executed beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
The effect control means exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section when the instruction game section is extended based on the information received from the game control means, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When the extension of the designated game section is decided, the game information is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the indicated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. Need to be eliminated.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the indicated game section (AT, etc.) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means
After starting the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached (for example, when "Yes" in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is ended.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the designated game section.
When it is decided to extend the designated game section and the designated game section has reached the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section before the decision of the extension (for example, when "Yes" in step S451 of FIG. 44), It is characterized by clearing the decision result related to the extension.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the original invention, even if it is decided to extend the indicated game section, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the decision result relating to the extension is given. Since it is cleared, it is possible to prevent the indicated game section from exceeding the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it difficult for the indicated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means
After starting the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is ended.
When the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the designated game section is started and the designated game section is started.
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the designated game section.
It is equipped with an extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the designated game section.
The extension decision table is
at least,
The first extension decision table (lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49) and
It has a second extension determination table (lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) in which the expected value of the degree of extension (additional number) to be determined is smaller than that of the first extension determination table.
Until the designated game section or advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value (the number of AT games is 1000 games), the degree of extension is determined using the first extension determination table, and the designated game section or advantageous section is the predetermined threshold value. When it reaches, the degree of extension is determined using the second extension determination table.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the degree of extension is determined using an extension determination table in which the expected value of the degree of extension is small. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the indicated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 6.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means
Equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role
It is possible to decide whether or not to extend the designated game section based on the winning combination in the combination drawing by the combination lottery means.
When the first combination (for example, small combination E1) is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the degree of extension (additional number) determined compared to when the second combination (for example, small combination D) is won. Expected value is high,
If the designated game section or advantageous section does not reach a predetermined threshold value (the number of AT games is 1000 games) and the first combination is won, the instruction game section is extended based on the winning of the first combination. The degree is determined (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52), and the degree is determined.
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold value and the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second combination.
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold value and the first combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined in the same manner as when the second combination is won (FIG. 50). ~ In FIG. 52, step S543)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section or advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the extension of the indicated game section is extended so that the expected value of the degree of extension determined becomes smaller. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the indicated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to set an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
Further, an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, and an external signal indicating special game is output during special game. These external signals and when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the on / off timing of the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the on / off of the external signal indicating the designated game section and the external signal indicating the special game from becoming unnatural when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game), and
Equipped with an external signal transmission means (70)
Perform a special game based on winning a special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means
When the designated game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is finished, the first external signal is turned off.
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off.
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the indicated game section and not during the special game, the first external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57).
When a special combination is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game is completed (FIG. 57). Example 2)
It is characterized by that.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
Equipped with an advantageous section display device (advantageous section display LED77) indicating that the section is advantageous.
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating that the advantageous section is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is terminated even during the special game (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the first external signal indicating the indicated game section can be turned off at a natural timing even when the special game crosses the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. ..

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to set an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
Further, although an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, how to control the external signal indicating AT when AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is a problem. It becomes.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately control an external signal indicating the designated game section when the designated game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means includes an external signal transmission means (70).
The external signal transmitting means
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off.
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the indicated game section, the predetermined external signal is turned off.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, it is possible to match the timing when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing when the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to set an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
Further, an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, but since the start and end of the special game and the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached are mixed with this external signal, the external signal of the external signal It is necessary to prevent the on / off timing from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the on / off of the external signal indicating the designated game section from becoming unnatural when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the start and end of the special game, and the instruction game section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game), and
Equipped with an external signal transmission means (70)
Perform a special game based on winning a special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section and not during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58).
When a special combination is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game is completed (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, the timing of reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the end of the special game, and the timing of turning off the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section are matched. Can be done.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, the problem is what kind of trigger the AT starts and what kind of trigger the AT ends.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable a wide range of game playability design by giving a feature to the start and end triggers of the indicated game section in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a)) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means includes a combination lottery means (61) for drawing a combination.
As a lottery state (RT) in which a combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, a first lottery state (for example, RT5) and a second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying combination are different are provided.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the designated game section can be executed.
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the player shifts to the second lottery state by satisfying the predetermined conditions (digesting 50 games), both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated. It is a feature.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section or the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the lottery state as an opportunity. This enables a wide range of playability designs.

12. Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 12 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
As the states controlled by the game control means, at least a first control state (precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal) are provided.
It is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor) on condition that it is an advantageous section.
In the first control state (AT), the indicated game section is started and the instruction game section is started.
When the conditions for shifting to the second control state (normal) are satisfied in the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pullback period, CZ, CZ pullback period), the state shifts to the second control state and the advantageous section ends. It is characterized by doing.
The second solution is, in the first solution,
When the transition condition to the second control state is satisfied in the first control state which is the instruction game section, the transition to the second control state is performed, and both the advantageous section and the instruction game section are terminated. ..

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section or the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the control state as an opportunity. This enables a wide range of playability designs.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 13 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
As a game state (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means, at least a first game state and a second game state are provided.
In the first game state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section can be executed and the indicated game section can be started.
It is characterized in that when the designated game section is started in the first game state and the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game shifts to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and the designated game section ends.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
When the predetermined number of games is exhausted in the designated game section of the first game state, the player shifts to the second game state and ends both the advantageous section and the designated game section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, the designated gaming section can be started or ended with the transition of the gaming state as an opportunity. This enables a wide range of playability designs.

14. Initial invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to set an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
However, the playability that only ends when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not sufficient to differentiate from other models.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to execute a game that is not bound by the upper limit of the advantageous section by making the advantageous section intermittently feasible even in the advantageous section having an upper limit.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means includes a combination lottery means (61) for drawing a combination.
As the lottery state in which the combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are different are different. )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (when replay 06 is displayed), the game shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section are entered. Finish both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute the lottery of "1/32").
In the normal section of the second lottery state, when a specific condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the lottery of "1/32" is won), the section shifts to the advantageous section and shifts to the advantageous section. It is possible to start the instruction game section based on
In the normal section of the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the section shifts to the advantageous section, but the designated game section is not started based on the shift to the advantageous section.

The second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of an advantageous section and the start and end of an instruction game section is provided.
The game control means includes a combination lottery means (61) for drawing a combination.
As the lottery state in which the combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (non-RT) in which the winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are different are different. )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (when replay 06 is displayed), the game shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section are entered. Finish both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute the lottery of "1/32").
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games are exhausted), the process shifts to the third lottery state.
There is a case where the process shifts to the third lottery state without going through the second lottery state.
Even in the normal section of the third lottery state, which has shifted without going through the second lottery state, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, the designated game section can be started after that.
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without going through the second lottery state, the designated game section is not started.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the designated game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the designated game section, and then the section is shifted to the advantageous section again. Since it is possible and the indicated game section can be started, it is possible to execute a game that is not bound by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition that allows the instruction game section to be started (the first solution means satisfying a specific condition in the second lottery state, and the second solution means go through the second lottery state). It is possible to prevent the designated game section from becoming more likely to be executed than necessary.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it is proposed to indicate to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of a special role. In this case, it is desired that the player's expectation is not lowered even during the special game.
The problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that the section is advantageous, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
The role lottery means (61) for drawing the role, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the output of the effect.
The role lottery means draws a role so as to have a case where a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game) is won.
The winning probability of the special role is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
After winning the special role, the game shifts to the special game based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped.
The advantageous section started based on winning the special role ends by the end of the special game (Example 1 or 2 in FIG. 64) and continues after the end of the special game (FIG. 65). Example 3) and
The effect control means is characterized in that it can output a continuous effect over a plurality of games with respect to the continuation of an advantageous section during a special game.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
The continuous production is characterized in that it suggests whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Initial invention 16
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it is proposed to indicate to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of a special role. In this case, it is desired that the player's expectation is not lowered even after the special game is completed.
The problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that the section is advantageous, and
Means for determining one of a plurality of set values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) and
The role lottery means (61) for drawing the role, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the output of the effect.
The role lottery means draws a role so as to have a case where a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game) is won.
The winning probability of the special role is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
After winning the special role, the game shifts to the special game based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped.
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends in a predetermined number of games (5 games) after the end of the special game (Example 4), and continues beyond the predetermined number of games (Example 4). 5) and
The effect control means can output a predetermined effect relating to the continuation of an advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the end of the special game.

17. Initial invention 17
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of a special role. In this case, the skill of the player cannot be demonstrated only by uniformly starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make a difference in the profit regarding the advantageous section depending on the skill of the player when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (9th embodiment (FIG. 67)) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role.
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a specific winning (1BBA + small combination E1).
The specific winning is a winning including a special role (1BBA) in which the winning is carried over to the next game until the combination of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined role (small role E1) in which the winning is not carried over to the next game.
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all set values,
When it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a specific winning game (“N” game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the winning of the special role is carried over to the next game. , The advantage section is started from the game (“N + 2” game) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role carried over to the winning can be stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the original invention, in the first game in which it is decided to shift to an advantageous section and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the symbol corresponding to the special combination It is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who stopped the combination and the player who could not stop the combination. As a result, the profit obtained in the advantageous section can be different depending on the skill of the player.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, it is possible to execute the addition of the AT based on the winning of the special role having no setting difference, but it is conceivable that the addition of the AT cannot be executed based on the winning of the special role having the setting difference. ing.
However, in this way, when a special role with a difference in setting is won during AT, there is a problem that the player cannot be expected to add AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when a special combination having a different setting is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (10th embodiment (FIG. 22)) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the instruction game section (AT).
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role.
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a special combination (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game) is won.
After winning the special role, the game shifts to the special game based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped.
As a lottery state in which a combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are provided.
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When shifting to a special game based on winning a special role during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. age,
When the first lottery state is changed to the second lottery state without shifting to the special game during the designated game section, the designated game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be extended when the state shifts from the first lottery state to the second lottery state, provided that the special game is executed. .. As a result, it is possible to extend the designated game section after the end of the special game regardless of whether or not the winning special combination has a setting difference. Further, it is possible to set so that the designated game section is not extended simply by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without going through the special game.

19. Initial invention 19
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is desired to provide a new game property by using the instruction function operating game.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to provide a new playability by using the instruction function operating game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (11th embodiment; FIG. 68) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the instruction game section (AT).
Means for determining one of a plurality of set values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) and
The role lottery means (61) for drawing the role, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the output of the effect.
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a predetermined combination (small combination E1) is won.
The winning probability of a predetermined combination is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the next game shifts to an advantageous section.
The advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the predetermined role is
A first advantageous section (in FIG. 68, Example 1) in which the instruction function operating game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed.
It has a second advantageous section (Example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the indicated game section, and has.
The effect control means is characterized in that a continuous effect is output in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
The effect control means is characterized in that the continuous effect is started after one instruction function operation game is executed.
The third solution is in the first or second solution.
The continuous effect is characterized in that it is an effect that suggests whether it is a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 19 According to the original invention, there are cases where the instruction game section is executed even after shifting to the advantageous section, and cases where the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being limited to the playability of shifting to / not shifting to the advantageous section.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 20 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit on the advantageous section. On the other hand, even if the shift to the advantageous section is performed, it is conceivable that the condition device (combination) having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to balance the end condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section and the execution of the instruction function operating game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment; FIG. 69)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means for determining one of a plurality of set values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) and
It is equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role.
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a predetermined combination (small combination E1) is won.
The winning probability of a predetermined combination is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the next game may shift to an advantageous section.
When the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is terminated.
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantage section is terminated.
In the advantageous section, if there is no game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch by the time the predetermined end condition is reached, the advantageous section is ended until at least one instruction function operation game is executed. Although not allowed (Example 3 in FIG. 69), if there has never been a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is advantageous without executing the instruction function operating game. End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the original invention, "execute at least one instruction function operating game" and "end the advantageous section when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached" in the advantageous section. You can balance it with things.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 21 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit in the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is conceivable that a special role will be won during the advantageous section and the game will shift to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that point, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment; FIG. 70)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means for determining one of a plurality of set values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) and
The role lottery means (61) for drawing the role, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the output of the effect.
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a special combination (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game) is won.
The effect control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started.
When the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is terminated and the specific effect is terminated.
Even when a special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the game shifts to the special game, the specific effect is continued.
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is terminated, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is completed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is terminated, but the output is performed during the advantageous section until the special game is completed. Continue the specific production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from suddenly ending in the middle of the special game, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

22. Original invention 22
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having a plurality of lottery states in which at least one replaying combination has a different winning probability.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine that shifts RT (lottery state) in order to execute AT is known.
In the conventional technique, it is known that the RT transition is performed, for example, by winning a specific condition device and stopping the combination of a specific symbol. However, there is a problem that the ease of RT migration may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the ease of migration of RT from being affected by the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role.
As the lottery state in which the combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, the first lottery state (RT2), the second lottery state (RT3), and the third lottery state (RT4) in which the winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are different are defined. Prepare,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a specific combination (replay group B) is won.
When a specific combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the process shifts to the second lottery state.
The winning probability of a specific combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a special combination (for example, 1BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBB game) is won.
If a special role is won in any of the lottery states and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, the game shifts to the third lottery state.
The winning probability of a special role is characterized by being different depending on the set value.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, the instruction function operating game is always executed in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, or the instruction game section (AT) in which the execution frequency is increased is provided.
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
If a special role is won during the designated game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game.
After the end of the special game, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

The third solution is in the first or second solution.
The instruction game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
When the designated game section is in the third lottery state, the designated game section is not extended.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of a specific combination that triggers the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all set values. The ease of transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 23 Same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
In the advantageous section, the instruction function operating game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the instruction game section (AT).
Means for determining one of a plurality of set values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) and
It is equipped with a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role.
As a lottery state in which a combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are provided.
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a specific replay combination (replay group C) is won in the second lottery state.
When a specific re-game combination is won in the second lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the game shifts to the first lottery state.
The winning probability of a specific re-game combination in the second lottery state is the same for all set values.
In the second lottery state, the combination lottery means draws a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined replay combination (replay A) is won.
Even if the predetermined re-game combination is won in the second lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped, the first lottery state is not entered.
The winning probability of the predetermined re-game combination in the second lottery state is characterized by being different depending on the set value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of a specific replaying combination that triggers the transition of the lottery state is the same for all the set values, so that the ease of transition of the lottery state is the set value. Can be unaffected by. Further, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of a predetermined re-game combination that does not trigger the transition to the lottery state is changed according to the set value. Therefore, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the ball output rate in the indicated game section. can do.

24. Initial invention 24
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 24 Same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
The role lottery means (61) for drawing the role, and
It is equipped with means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values.
As a lottery state in which a combination is drawn by the combination lottery means, a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one re-game combination are different are provided.
When the predetermined conditions are met in the first lottery state, the process shifts to the second lottery state.
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where the first combination (small combination B group) having the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the first winning combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values.
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a second combination (small combination D) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the second winning combination in the first lottery state differs depending on the set value.
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means draws a combination so as to have a case where a third combination (small combination E1) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the third winning combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values.
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first role is stopped is D1 (9 cards), and the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second role is stopped is D2 (15 cards), which is the third role. When the maximum payout when the combination of corresponding symbols is stopped is D3 (2 cards)
D2>D1> D3
It is characterized by satisfying.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, there is an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed.
When the third combination is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means during the normal section, it is characterized by having the possibility of shifting to the advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of the first winning combination having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is the same for all set values, so that the first lottery state It is possible to prevent the ease of transition from the second lottery state to the second lottery state from being affected by the set value.
Further, since the winning probability of the second winning combination with the largest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be greatly changed according to the set value.

25. Initial invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to change the end condition of the advantageous section after starting the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, it is considered necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at an intended timing while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (14th embodiment; FIG. 72)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, there is an advantageous section in which it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once.
When the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed.
When a predetermined condition (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied during the advantageous section, the end condition (30 games) of the advantageous section up to that point is changed (50 games are added).
When the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied after the instruction function operation game is executed at least once in the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game is performed 1 after the end condition is changed. It is possible to finish the advantageous section without executing it many times (Example 1 in FIG. 72).
If the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on satisfying the predetermined conditions after shifting to the advantageous section and before executing the first instruction function operating game, at least once after the change of the end condition. If the instruction function operation game is not executed, the advantageous section cannot be ended even if the end condition is satisfied (Example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 25 According to the original invention, after starting the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section up to that point can be changed. Therefore, the end condition of the advantageous section is not fixed and the advantageous section is not fixed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section, at the timing intended by the advantageous section because the instruction function operating game has not been executed even once even though the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the inability to finish.

26. Initial invention 26
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 26 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to execute a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving the player sufficient profit, the player may be uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to properly execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (15th embodiment; FIG. 73) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operating game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode, and a game for operating the instruction function.
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, there is an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed.
When the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed.
As the end condition of the advantageous section, there are at least two types of first end condition and second end condition.
The advantageous section of the first end condition has a larger expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section than the advantageous section of the second end condition.
Equipped with a freeze control means to control the freeze that temporarily stops the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute freeze when the advantageous section ends under the second end condition (CZ end condition), and freezes when the advantageous section ends under the first end condition (AT end condition). It is characterized by executing.

The second solution is, in the first solution,
It is characterized in that during the freeze, the profit obtained during the advantageous section is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when the freeze is executed according to the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By providing a case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

1 Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal insertion slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board (50A, 50B) Main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Winning flag control means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Number of acquisitions display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section.
In the normal section, in the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained, there is no case where the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is notified.
In the advantageous section, in the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained, there is a case where the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous.
Equipped with a storage means that can be updated according to the execution of the game in the advantageous section,
When a special symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to shift to the special game state.
In the special gaming state in the advantageous section, the information stored in the storage means can be updated according to the execution of the game.
Even in the game before the end of the special game state, if the information stored in the storage means becomes a value for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section is configured to end.
When the predetermined conditions are met in the advantageous section, the ending effect can be executed.
When the ending effect is being executed in a game that ends the advantageous section under a predetermined situation, the ending effect is ended and the ending effect is ended.
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a case where a predetermined freeze is executed at the end of an advantageous section and a case where a predetermined freeze is not executed at the end of an advantageous section.

Images